7040 - Multifunction Printer KONICA MINOLTA - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 9.5/10 📄 307 pages EN 💬 AI Question

USER MANUAL 7040 KONICA MINOLTA

Before copying, read this guide. Keep in the right hand rear pocket of the machine.

Thank you very much for your purchase of the Konica 7040. This Manual deals with making copies, correct handling of the machine, and precautions for safety. Please read before copying. In order to maintain a satisfactory copying performance, please keep this Manual readily available for reference in the right hand rear pocket of the machine. ENERGY STAR Program The ENERGY STAR Program has been established to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of energy-efficient technologies that reduce energy consumption and prevent pollution. As an ENERGY or fft STAR Partner, Konica Corporation, Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency grounding it on the following features. Auto Low Power This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing unit. In the standard setting, Auto Low Power operates automatically when 15 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time. The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, or 240 minutes. See p. 5-2 for details. Automatic Shut-Off This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning OFF the power supply, thereby reducing energy consumption to 80W or less. In the standard setting, Automatic Shut-Off follows Auto Low Power, operating automatically when 60 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time. The time period for the Automatic Shut-Off function can be set for 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes or 240 minutes. See p. 5-3 for details. Automatic Duplex Copying To reduce paper consumption, use this function to make double-sided (duplex) copies, automatically. We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function, the Automatic Shut-Off function, and the Automatic Duplex Copying function.

Section 1: Precautions for Installation and Use

1. Caution Labels and Indicator

2. Danger, Warning and Caution Symbols -

3. Requirements for Safe Use

Power Source Environment-- Precautions for Ro

Section 2: Preparation for Use

Toner Supply Indication - Preparation --- Adding Toner

2. Operational P anel- 3-5

Section 4 : LCD Operation

2. Electronic Key Counter (EKC)

How to Read the PM Coun

CONTENTS (continued)

2. Basic Operation for Copying - 6-4

12 Copying 2} 2 Copying 2B 1 Copying --- 122 Copying by Using the Platen Glass

4. Copy Density -------"

AË (Automatic Exposure) Manual Density Adjustment Density Shift

Preset/Userse Zoom----- Vertical/ Horizontal Zoom

6. Paper Size Selection

7. Automatic Settings ---

ATS (Automatic Tray Switching APS (Automatic Paper Size Selection) -- AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) - Auto Reset AE (Automatic Exposure)

Rotation and APS Rotation and AMS To Release Automatic Rotation -----"""" 6-38

2. Reserve Mode and ] ob List

Reserve J ob Setting Job List Screen---- Troubleshooting in Reserve Setting

Check Screen and How to Make a Proof Copy How to View the Check Screen -1-26

5. HELP Button - -1-28

Help Basic Screen -7-28 Help Screens for the Output Modes -7-30 Help Screens for the J ob Memory--- 7-30 Help Screen for the Paper J am Position Scree Help Screens for Manual Setting on the Basic Screen Help Screens for the Application Selection Screen --- 6.J0B MEMORY Button -

CONTENTS (continued)

3. Chapter --- -8-14

Section 9: Special Copying: Copy Image

2. Inserting a New Staple Cartridg

3. Output Mode for Machine without Finisher

Normal Exit © HO U1R W NH

2. System Initial [1]

Time [1] ---- Language [2]-

3. Copier Initial [2] - -11-8

Copy Mode [1 -11-9 Density [2] - 11-10 Magnification [3] 11-11 Tray [4]--- 11-12 Output [5] Image Quality [6

CONTENTS (continued)

How to Access the EKC Setting Mode Change EKC Data [1] EKC Data List [2] - All Counter Reset [3] EKC On/Off Setting [4] Copy Limit Reached Effect [5

How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mod: Weekly Timer Setting [1] Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set [2] - Machine Working Day Individual Set [3] Lunch Hour Off Function [4 Password Setting [5]-----

11. Touch Panel Adjustment [10

Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble Copy Conditions Using Memory Action 1 -- Action 2 --

3. Paper J am Processing

Jam in Current J ob Jam in Reserve ] ob- Paper J am Position Screen -- Paper J am Processing Screen -

4. Power OFF/ON Screen

1. Main Body Specifications

FS-105 In-Bin Stapler Finisher - Drawer Base Unit (DB-208) -- Drawer Base Unit (DB-208A) Drawer Base Unit (DB-608) Memory Unit - Key Counter

Maintenance Kit 100,000 copies) (except for the United Kingdom) 13-6

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use

1. Caution Labels and Indicator

2. Danger, Warning and Caution Symbols

3. Requirements for Safe Use

Power Source Environment Precautions for Routine Handling

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use 1. Caution Labels and Indicator

1. Caution Labels and Indicator

The caution labels and indicator are attached to the machine areas, as shown below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any dangerous situations or serious injury. AN caurio! TI ternal area is very hot. To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUC | d ACAUTON | AS sus | Ses Main body

GEL (Avcaunon ATTENTION VORSICHT PRECAUION ATTENZIONE DO NOT PUT your hands beneath or above the DO NOT INSERT your \ middle exit tray of the Finisher when it is moving, otherwise you may be injured. finger into the two staple driving portions or into the grooves of the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be injured. If you touch any place which you are advised by any caution label or caution indicator to keep yourself away from, you may be burned or injured. Do not remove caution labels or indicators. If any caution label or caution indicator is soiled, please clean to make legible. If you cannot make them legible, or ifthe caution label or indicator is damaged, please contact your Service Centre.

Precaution for Installation and Use

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use 2. Danger, Warning and Caution Symbols

2. Danger, Warning and Caution Symbols

The following indicators are used on the caution labels or in this manual to categorize the level of safety cautions. À Dance: Action highly liable to cause a death or serious injury. JAN WARNING: Action liable to cause a death or serious injury. AN caurion: Action liable to cause light injury, medium trouble or physical damage. If you find any of these indicators when removing jammed paper, adding toner, or reading the manual, be sure to follow the information. Ifthe safety cautions in the manual become illegible due to soilage, etc., please buy a new copy from your Service Centre.

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use 3. Requirements for Safe Use

3. Requirements for Safe Use

To ensure your safe use of the machine, the following describes the precautions you are required to observe without fail for the power source of the machine and during installation and routine handling. Be sure to read and observe them. Power Source A CAUTION: Plug Socket Socket *_A plug socket is limited in capacity. Use only à power source with the correct rating for the machine; otherwise, hazardous situations such as smoking or overheating may occur. See the following list to match the power supply and power consumption: a) 230V/50Hz: More than 10A b) 110V/60Hz: More than 15A c) 230V/60Hz: More than 10A d) 127V/60Hz: More than 15A + Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. Do not use multiple outlet adaptors.

A CAUTION: ETAT ENTRE]

• Be sure to insertthe power plug firmly into the power socket. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of smoking or overheating. If the inserted power plug is loose in the socket, even after it has been positively inserted, disconnect the plug and contact your electrical contractor. *_ The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. + Do notbend or crush the power lead. If your copier power lead is bentor damaged in any way, contact your Service Centre immediately. Do not attempt to repair it yourself, and do not continue to operate the copier. A damaged power lead may result in overheating, a short circuit, or fire. *_ Do not bundle or coil the power lead of the copier. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of overheating or fire. A (@:\U(e\EE Connecting Multiple Loads to One Socket Outlet Prohibited Never connect multiple loads to one socket outlet using a multi-outlet extension lead or branched socket. Otherwise an accident may occur as a result of overheating or fire. AUTION: ESCORT An extension lead should never be used with this machine. L'*

Precaution for Installation and Use

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use 3. Requirements for Safe Use (continued)

• Be sure to attach the earth wire to the machine and connect it to the ground correctiy; otherwise, a leak may occur to electrically shock the operator during machine operation. The earth wire is supplied as an accessory to the machine. wire (Taiwal nd the Philippines Only) *_ The earth wire connected to any inadequate place may cause explosion orelectric shock. Do not connect the earth wire to any of the following: (1)Gas pipe (2) Lightening conductor (3) Earth wire for telephone (4)Resin water pipe, or any water pipe or tap not allowed to be connected to the earth wire by Waterworks Office If you have any questions on connecting the earth wire, please consult your Service Centre. Environment

Do not install near flammable materials, curtains and volatile combustibles, that can catch or cause fire. A (\Ui (0 Prevention of Short Circuit Do not install the copier where it could be splashed with rain water, or water from a tap, to avoid a short circuit. A UNE Temperature and Humidity + _ Keep away from direct sunlight, heat sources such as stoves, cool air from an air conditioner and hot air from a heater. *_Avoid any environment that is outside the range shown below: 10 to 30°C in temperature 10 to 80% in humidity. AN CAUTION: Ventilation. *_ Maintain the installation place well-ventilated. *_ Keep away from dustor corrosive gases. These materials may cause poor image quality. *_ During the use of machine, the machine generates ozone but in an insufficient amount to cause any hazard to the human body. However, if the machine is used in à poorly ventilated room, many copies are made, or plural copiers are used atthe same time, an odour may be detected. Ensure adequate ventilation for a comfortable working environment. 1-5 |

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use

3. Requirements for Safe Use (continued)

A CAUTION Vibration | Do not install on a floor which is subject to vibration or is not 1 level.

CAUTION: RAÉSIEL CAT ET

Allow sufficient space for facilitating copy operation, changing TE — parts, and periodic inspection. Especially leave an adequate space behind the machine to let a hot air out from the rear fan. Unit: mm Ï 1,200 L— 400 645 430. un À

Precaution for Installation and Use

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use 3. Requirements for Safe Use (continued)

• Dimensions required when the Finisher is withdrawn. Konica 7040 +FS-105 +DB-608 Precautions for Routine Handling A (@:\U (el Actions in Response to Troubles *_lfthe Service Call screen is displayed and copier operations cannot be continued any more, stop the operation to prevent any unexpected accident. Write down the Report Code as stated on the 2nd line ofthe message, then switch offthe copier and disconnect from the power socket. Contact your Service Centre and inform them ofthe ReportCode. *_ Do nottouch the high temperature or high voltage parts indicated with caution labels or described in the manual. *_ Do not touch the inside of the machine for any other purpose than removing jammed paper or adding toner. *_Ifmachine repairis necessary, be sure to contact your Service Centre. Never attempt to repair it by yourself. *_Ifany abnormal sound, smell or smoke comes from the machine, immediately stop using it, turn off the power switch, disconnectthe power plug and contact your Service Centre. +_lfthe breaker trips orthe fuse blows, turn off the power switch, resetthe breaker or the fuse, and turn on the machine. If the same situation occurs again, contact your Service Centre. *_Insure the replacement fuse conforms with the rating of the power source. Never use a fuse with an incorrect rating.

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use 3. Requirements for Safe Use (continued)

Do not use volatile combustibles such as a thinner or alcohol near the machine. VAN @\U A Prohibition of Machine Modification Do not modify or remove any parts by yourself. A @\Ure]\'H Prevention of Machine Troubles CE a? *_ Do not drop small metallic objects such as paper clips or staples inside the machine.

• Do not place any heavy or hard objects such as a vase, books or ornaments on the machine. A (@\U Te) Recommendation of Periodic Check Be sure to check periodically the following points: (1) The main lead or the power plug does not generate abnormal heat. (2) The power plug is not inserted loosely or the lead is not cut or scratched. (3) The earth wire is correctly connected. (4) The power plug or the power outlet is not covered with dust. If you find anything abnormal in the above items, stop using the machine and contact your Service Centre. A CAUTION: Toner | *_ Keep the toner cartridge away from children. The toner is nontoxic; however if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice. + _ Do notthrow the empty toner cartridge into a fire. Ifitis thrown into a fire the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation. AN CAUTION: | LCD Screen | The touch screen is covered with a glass. Do not drop solid objects on the touch screen, or putexcess weight or pressure onit; otherwise the glass may be scratched or broken and you may be injured. A (:\Ue\ÉE Finisher Paper Capacity The capacity of the Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exittray whilstthe copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/nv paper. Non-Sort Mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/10 sheets (thin/thick paper, transparency film, etc.) Tray 2/3: 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8"x13", A5R*) | 1-8

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use 3. Requirements for Safe Use (continued)

DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving portions or into the grooves of the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be injured. DO NOT PUT your hands beneath or above the middle exit tray of the Finisher when it is moving, otherwise you may be injured. A (\U(e\T Clearing Wedged Staples Please be careful when clearing wedged staples since it may cause injury. A (:\U(e\TE Paper Capacity for the Exit Tray The exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. If a copy run of more than 100 is required, be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. A (ei (e\ TE Power Saver and Weekly Timer *_ During Power Saver mode the copier is still connected to the mains power supply and power is still applied to certain areas of the machine. To avoid any unexpected troubles turn the power OFF when not using the copier for long periods of time. *__Whenthe Weekly Timerindicatoris lit, turning power OFF will disable weekly timer function. AN CAUTION: The Fixing unit is internally very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. Be careful when withdrawing the fixing unit. AN CAUTION: The drum unit has a high voltage generated. To avoid an electrical shock, DO NOT TOUCH.

PANCUUO ADU Guide Plate The ADU guide plate is not latched when raised. Do notrelease it, otherwise the ADU guide plate will slam shut and may cause injury.

Precaution for Installation and Use

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use

A (:\U(e\ EE Dispose of a Disused Copying Machine Do not dispose of this copier yourself. Contact your Service Centre, who can arrange for its safe disposal. If you change the place of installation, please contact your Service Centre.

Section 1 : Precautions for Installation and Use 3. Requirements for Safe Use (continued)

Precaution for Installation and Use

Section 2: Preparation for Use

Toner Supply Indication Preparation Adding Toner

Section 2 : Preparation for Use

Paper Out Indication When the paper tray is empty, the size key on the Basic screen is dimmed. Basic screen Size key is dimmed. Touchthe “PAPER SIZE”key on the Basic screen to display the Tray Selection screen. The Paper Out icon appears in the tray key on the Tray Selection screen. Load the copy paper into the tray. Tray Selection screen Paper Out icon

Section 2 : Preparation for Use

UE Mulisheet LT TE==. Muïisheet £ j Bypass Tray ] a Tray j io —," ADU D 1 ei ÈS | _rray 2 —— 772 grey 3 ES Pree 4 _Tray 4 sl Le = Konica 7040 + DB-208 = _ Konica 7040 + DB-208A Multi-sheet +———— ve Bypass Tray ADU —j Try 1 ÈS — 72 Konica 7040 + DB-608 Tray Specifications Tray 1-4 (machine with DB-208): Universal tray Copy paper capacity : 500 sheets (80g/m°?) Copy paper size Paper weight : A3, B4, F4 (8.5"x13"), A4R, A4, B5SR, B5, ASR, 8.5"x11"R : 60 to 90g/m? (80g/m? is recommended.) Tray 1-2 (machine with DB-208A/608): Universal tray Copy paper capacity : 500 sheets (80g/m) Copy paper size Paper weight : A3, B4, F4 (8.5"x13"), A4R, A4, B5SR, B5, ASR, 8.5"x11"R : 60 to 90g/m? (80g/m? is recommended.) Tray 3 (machine with DB-608): Service-fixed tray Copy paper capacity : 1,500 sheets (80g/m?) Copy paper size Paper weight : A4 (The copy paper size can be changed to the following. Contact your Service Centre.) AGR, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" : 60 to 90g/m? (80g/m? is recommended.) Multi-sheet bypass tray: A3 to A5R Copy paper capacity : 100 sheets (80g/m°?) Paper weight Use 1 sheet at a time for thin/thick paper, OHP transparent film/reproducible paper/label paper : plain paper; 60 to 90g/m? (80g/m? is recommended.) thick paper; 91 to 130g/m? thin paper; 50 to 59g/m° 2-3 | Paper Supply

Section 2 : Preparation for Use 1. Paper Supply (continued)

For easy feeding Fan the copy paper a few times in order to prevent paper misfeeds. How to store paper Store paper on a flatsurface in a cool, dry area. Keep partially used packages tightly wrapped during storage. How to load copy paper Stack paper curly side up into each tray. Copy paper capacity Be sure not to stack above the red line of the label as shown below.

Section 2 : Preparation for Use 1. Paper Supply (continued) ""*°*#"

Loading Paper Loading Paper into the universal tray 1 Withdraw the universal tray from the main body.

2. Remove the rear guide plate, and insertit into the position of your desired paper size.

Please Be Reminded! Be sure to align the rear guide plate to the paper; otherwise, any unexpected situations may occur to the machine.

3. Stack paper with curly side UP.

4. Whilst pressing the release knob, move the side guide plate against the paper.

5. Push in the universal tray until it locks into place.

Loading paper into the service-fixed tray 1 Withdraw the service-fixed tray from the main body.

2. Whilst pressing the release knob, widen the side guide plate.

3. Stack paper with curly side UP.

Please Be Reminded! Do not load paper other than the paper size indicated atthe front of the tray; otherwise this may cause problems with the machine.

4. Whilst pressing the release knob, move the side guide plate against the paper.

5. Push in the service-fixed tray until it locks into place.

Section 2 : Preparation for Use 1. Paper Supply (continued)

Loading paper into the Large Capacity Tray (Service-fixed) 1 Withdraw the tray from the main body.

2. Stack paper with curly side UP.

The bottom of the tray will lower as the paper is stacked into the tray.

3. Push in the tray until it locks into place.

Loading paper into the Multi-sheet bypass tray Refer to p. 7-39 to p. 7-40.

Section 2 : Preparation for Use 2. Toner Supply """"""

Toner Supply Indication When toner supply is low, “Please add toner” message and the icon “”’ will be displayed in the message area of the Basic screen. Add toner according to the procedure as follows. Basic screen

Ad dd Toner Icon Display Service can set the copier not to display the icon “El à] ” on the screen. Please contact your Service Centre. Please Be Reminded! Only use the toner cartridge specified for the machine. Using a toner cartridge not specified for the 7040 will cause copy quality problems. ANCAUTION: Keep the toner cartridge away from children. Although the toner is nontoxic, do notinhale toner or allow itto come in contact with eyes. Ifinhalation oreye contactoccurs, immediately seek medical advice. ANCAUTION: ot throw the empty toner cartri r may ignite and cause ngerous situa Advice-Disposal of Empty Toner Cartridge Put the empty toner cartridge into the attached plastic bag before disposing of it as incombustible trash.

Section 2 : Preparation for Use 2. Toner Supply (continued)

Preparation The toner may be compact during storage. Follow the instructions below prior to adding the toner. 1 Shake the toner cartridge several times to loosen toner.

2. Remove the toner cartridge cap.

Adding Toner 1 Open the front door of the machine. Pull the unit 90° to the right.

2. Push and release the cartridge lock lever to the right

Section 2 : Preparation for Use 2. Toner Supply (continued) a

4. Setthe new toner cartridge into the toner unit.

Please Be Reminded! Align the À mark on the toner cartridge with the À mark on the toner unit as illustrated right.

5. Return and lock the cartridge lock lever to the leftuntilit &

stops. The lock tape will be pushed out. >

6. Remove the lock tape.

7. Return the toner unit to its original position, then close

the machine's front door securely.

Section 3: Component Locations

External 4 (DRADF (Reversing Automatic Document F eeder) GLCD touch screen (SOperation panel ;

Section 3 : Component Locations 1. Main Body (continued)

® RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds multiple originals one at a time to the platen glass for copying. @ Work table (option) provides à convenient workspace for documents both before and after copying. @) Multi-sheet bypass tray used for small quantity copying onto plain paper or special paper. @ Key counter (option) manages the number of copies made on the machine. Upper right side cover opens to allow the removal of misfed paper. Lower right side cover opens to allow the removal of misfed paper. ADU is used for stackless duplex copying.

3) Tray 1 (Universal tray) is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either A3/B4/F4

(8.5"x13")/A4R/A4/B5SR/B5/ASR or 8.5"x11"R. @) Tray 2 (of DB-208/208A/608 option) (universal tray) is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either A3/B4/F4 (8.5"x13")/A4R/A4/B5R/B5/A5R or 8.5"x11"R. 40 Tray 3 (of DB-608 option) is initially fixed at A4 and holds 1,500 sheets. It can be reset by service to size A4R/B5R/B5/8.5"x11"R or 8.5"x11". Tray 3 (of DB-208 option) (universal tray) is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either A3/B4/F4 (8.5"x13")/A4R/A4/B5R/B5/ASR or 8.5"x11"R. 4 Tray 4 (of DB-208 option) (universal tray) is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either A3/B4/F4 (8.5"x13")/A4R/A4/B5R/B5/ASR or 8.5"x11"R. 42 Storage accommodates copy paper or copy materials. 43 Front door opens to the internal copier to allow for the clearing of misfed paper and the replenishing of toner. (à Left side cover opens to allow for the removal of misfed paper. Main power switch turns machine power On/Off to operate it as copier/printer. Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, and groups copies into finished set. Power switch turns copier power On/Off when pressed. 48 LCD touch screen displays interactive operation screens. ANCAUTION: LCD Screen The toi screen is covered with a glass. Do not drop solid objects on the touch screen, or put excess weight or pressure on it; otherwise the glass may bes ed or broken and you may be injured. 49 Operation panel controls copier operations and displays messages as required. ANCAUTION: If the Service Call screen is displayed (see p. 12-2) and copier operations cannot be continued any more, stop the operation to prevent any unexpected accident. Write down the Report Code as stated on the 2nd line of message, then switch off the copier and disconnect from the power socket. Contact your Service Centre and inform them of the Report Code. ‘Component: Locations

Section 3 : Component Locations 1. Main Body (continued)

(Toner cartridge @Total counter en @Fixing unit @Toner unit @Drum unit / FE XQN @XKnob 3 @Knob 2 @Lever1 Internal Toner cartridge holds toner and is to be replaced when supplying toner. Toner unit holds the toner supply. Drum unit forms the copy image. Knob 3 can be turned to ease removal of misfed paper. Lever 1 can be moved to ease removal of misfed paper. Knob 2 can be turned to ease removal of misfed paper from the fixing unit. @®) Fixing unit fuses the toner onto the copy paper. ANCAUTION: The Drum unit has a high voltage generated. To avoid an electrical shock, DO NOT TOUCH. @®) Total counter indicates the total number of copies made. ANCAUTION: The Fixing unitis internally very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. Be careful when removing misfed paper.

Section 3 : Component Locations 2. Operation Panel

@ LCD touch screen displays machine and copying status; help information; interactive screen; and touch keys for selecting all functions. ANCAUTION: The toi screen is covered with a glass. Do not drop solid objects on the touch screen, or put excess weight or pressure on it; otherwise the glass may be scratched or broki nd you may be injured. ANCAUTION: If the Service Call screen is displayed (see p. 12-2) and copier operations cannot be continued any more, stop the operation to prevent any unexpected accident. Write down the Report Code as stated on the 2nd line of message, then switch off the copier and disconnect from the power socket. Contact your Service Centre and inform them of the Report Code.

2) CHECK button displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current job.

HELP button displays a screen with help for the currently selected function. DATA indicator blinks while receiving print data in printer mode, then lights after completing it. Numeric keypad enters numeric values. ERROR indicator lights when trouble occurs in Reserve mode. Weekly timer indicator lights when the weekly timer function is set. ) POWER SAVER ON/OFF button activates powersaving mode fortimes when the copier is inactive, or activates timer interrupt mode when weekly timer function is active. @) INTERRUPT button stops copying in progress to allow copying from the platen glass. STOP/CLEAR button stops the copying sequence; deletes the stored memory. START PRINT button activates copying. CLEAR OTY. button allows resetting of print quantity. P button accesses programming modes for setting special functions. MODE button switches copy and printer mode. (It cannot be programmed.) AUTO RESET button restores copier to automatic mode settings or to key operator settings. J0B MEMORY button displays screens for selecting job store/job recall functions. APPLICATION button displays a menu for selecting special application functions. 48 OUTPUT button displays screens for selecting Finisher exittray, sort/group/staple-sort, or face up mode in the machine with Finisher, or selecting E-sort on/off, sort/group, or face up mode in the machine without Finisher. 49 Power switch (not shown) on left of the operation panel; turns machine power on/off.

‘Component: Locations

| A @Finisher lower tray | Cartridge holders

Finisher upper tray ejects copy paper in Non-sort mode. Staple drive portions staples the exit set in Non-sort, Sort, Group or Staple-sort mode. Finisher middle tray ejects copy paper in Non-Sort, Sort, Group, or Staple-sort mode. Finisher lower tray ejects copy paper in Non-Sort, Sort, Group, or Staple-sort mode. Release lever releases the Finisher from the main body when clearing misfed paper or supplying staples. ® Cartridge holders hold staple cartridges to be replace when supplying staples.

Section 4 : LCD Operation

Check Screen Help Screen Screens for Setting J ob Memory Service Call Screen Paper J am Position and Paper J am Processing Screens Power OFF/ON Screen Key Operator Mode Screens

Section 4 : LCD Operation 1. Screen Types

The copier has a large Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the centre of the operation panel. During setting ofthe copying conditions, the system displays a touch panel with explanatory messages required forthe operation to facilitate operation and increase efficiency. During copying, messages explaining the current status of the copier are displayed. *_Ifyou do not know how to operate any function, the operation can be checked on-screen by calling the Help screen. + When any trouble such as paper jamming occurs, the system displays the appropriate action to be taken. This chapter introduces the types of screens and explains how to display them.

The types of screens are as follows: Wake-Up screen — Basic screen (Layer Selection screen and Full-Automatic Mode screen) Copy Mode screen (p. 6-12, p. 6-15, p.6-18, p. 6-21) Density Adjustment screen (p. 6-25) Lens Mode Screen (p. 6-28 - p. 6-32) Zoom screen (p. 6-29) Vertical/Horizontal Zoom screen (p. 6-31) Tray Selection screen (p. 6-33) Reserve Setting screen (p. 7-11 —p. 7-16) Job List screen (p. 7-14 -p. 7-15) Output screen (p. 6-38 , p. 10-2 - p. 10-19) Quality Selection screen (p. 7-17, p. 7-20) Application Selection screen Sheet Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen, Sheet/Cover Insertion Setting screen (p. 8-4 —p. 8-13) Chapter Insertion Setting screen (p. 8-14 - p. 8-18) Combination Mode Selection screen (p. 8-19 - p. 8-23) OHP Interleave Mode Selection screen (p. 8-29 -p. 8-32) Image Insertion Setting screen (p. 8-33 - p. 8-38) Dual Page Mode Selection screen (p. 8-39 -p. 8-43) Text/Photo Enhance Mode Selection screen (p. 9-2 -p. 9-5) Repeat Mode Selection screen (p. 9-10 - p. 9-14) Frame/F old Erasure Mode Selection screen (p. 9-15 -p. 9-18) Thin/Thick Paper Mode Selection screen (p. 9-23 - p. 9-26) Image Shift Mode Selection screen (p.9-27- p. 9-35) + Check screen (p. 4-7, p. 7-22 -p. 7-27) + Help screen (p. 4-7, p. 7-28 - p. 7-32) + Screens for the J ob memory (p. 4-8, p. 7-33 - p. 7-35) F- Service Call screen (p. 4-8, p. 12-2 -p. 12-3) F- Paper ] am Position screen, Paper] am Processing screen (p. 4-9, p. 12-6 — p. 12-9) — Power OFF/ON screen (p. 4-9, p. 12-12) Key Operator Mode screen (p. 4-10, p. 11-2 -p. 11-50) j‘°

Wake-Up and Basic Screen When the power is switched ON, the Wake-Up screen will appear in a short space of time, then the Basic screen will appear. “Please wait Copier is warming up” message is displayed. When the system is ready for copying, “Position original in the RADF face-up” message will displayed. Wake-Up screen Konica Basic screen Basic screen

Section 4 : LCD Operation 2. Basic Screen (continued)

Basic Screen: Layer Selection Screen (Full-Automatic Mode Screen) The 7040 displays Layer Selection screen (Full-Automatic Mode screen) as the Basic screen. 5ee section 6: Basic Copying on Basic Screen” and “Section 7: Other Basic Functions” for etails. The Layer Selection screen (Full-Automatic Mode screen) displays four keys atthe bottom, namely, “COPY MODE”, “COPY DENSITY”, “LENS MODE”, and “PAPER SIZE”. Touch each key to display subsequent screens of each mode for manual setting. After specifying the desired copying conditions, it automatically returns to the Layer Selection screen.

PAPER s12E . QE LEE) Copy Mode Lens Mode Copy Mode Lens Mode screen screen screen screen Density Adjustment Tray Selection Density Adjustment Tray Selection screen screen screen screen When the Basic screen is displayed, the copying conditions are specified as follows: AE (Automatic Exposure): ON Lens mode (Magnification): 1.00 (full size) APS (Automatic Paper size Selection): ON RADF (Reversible Automatic Document Feeder): ON Copy mode: 11 Finisher (option): OFF Print quantity: 1 Image qualitiy: Normal Power saver: ON Auto reset: OFF ATS (Automatic Tray Switching): OFF Rotation: ON (with APS/AMS) Reserve setting is not available. Status screen can be displayed. When the initial settings are changed in the Key Operator mode, the changed copying conditions are displayed in the Basic Screen. To display the Full-Automatic Mode screen initially as the Basic screen, contact your Service Centre, then select “Full-Auto”in the Memory settings of the Key operator setting. See p. 11- 45-p. 11-48. Advice: Timing of pressing the START PRINT button The system is ready for copying after the Basic screen is displayed. Copying is also ready when the Copy Mode, Lens Mode, Density Adjustment or Tray Selection screen is displayed. To indicate that copying is ready, the START PRINT button lights up in green. Pressing the START PRINT button causes the system to exitthe currentscreen and return to the Basic screen, and starts copying.

Section 4 : LCD Operation 2. Basic Screen (continued)

Basic Screen: Direct Selection Screen The Direct Selection screen can be selected as the Basic Screen. Contact your Service Centre. This type of Basic screen allows you to view other basic settings while making a change, as it remains displayed without developing into subsequent screens in each mode. Direct Selection screen

Section 4 : LCD Operation 3. Application Selection Screen

Appears when the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel is pressed when the Basic screen is displayed. Application Selection screen + tion Function Sheet /Cor Te zU 'Phot AUTO repter Image Thin/Thick EN FRE 16 keys are displayed on the Application Selection screen. Touching a key displays à screen for specifying advanced copying conditions. (Booklet, Mixed original, Reverse image, Auto layout, and Non image area erase do not have the corresponding screens.) Touching the “OK” key returns the system to the Application Selection screen. However, if you touch a key for a copy condition that cannot be used together with the previously set copy condition, the screen goes dark and either no selection can be made or the previous copy condition is cancelled. *_ When setting an application function which requires Store mode, the “Store mode” key on the Application Selection screen will be highlighted automatically.

• To release all the selected application functions, touch the “ALL CLEAR” key on the Application Selection screen. *_ Touching the “OK” key on the Application Selection screen returns the system to the Basic screen. Copying cannot start unless the Basic screen is displayed.

• To recover the former copying conditions, touch “CANCEL” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 8-2 to p. 8-3 in “Section 8: Special Copying-P age Editing” for details.

Section 4 : LCD Operation 4. Other Screens

Check Screen The Check screen appears when the CHECK button on the Operation panel is pressed when a screen other than the Help, Paper J am Position, or Paper J am Processing screen is displayed. Using the Check screen allows the currently set copying conditions to be confirmed with the copying conditions list. When the “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen is touched, you can produce a set of a sample copy to view the results ofthe copying conditions. After Proof copy, the "*#" mark will be displayed on the left of the changeable items in the Check screen. Make changes on the items with the "#"' mark on each screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27. Check screen CHECK MODE Print Quantity . Image quality Copy Mode Copy Densi Lens Hode … Paper Size . Paper Type . Output Mode

Help Screen The Help screen is a generic name forthe screens that give you information on how to copy, how to supply toner or paper, or how to operate the Operation panel and the keys on the LCD screen. Two types of Help screens are available, according to how they are selected. @ Press the HELP button on the Operation panel while the Basic screen is displayed. The Help Basic screen will appear. @ Press the HELP button on the Operation panel when a screen for specifying a desired copy condition is displayed. The screen displaying the corresponding setting procedure will be displayed. See p. 7-28 to p. 7-32. Help Basic screen

Section 4 : LCD Operation 4. Other Screens (continued)

Screens for Setting J ob Memory Job No.Selection screen appears when the JOB MEMORY button on the Operation panel is pressed when the Basic screen is displayed, after specifying the copying conditions to be registered on the Basic or Application Selection screen. See p. 7-33 to p. 7-35. Job No. Selection screen ABC COMPANY MAIL afelolol—

Section 4 : LCD Operation 4. Other Screens (continued)

Paper J am Position and Paper Jam Processing Screens The Paper J am Position screen appears upon occurrence of a paper jam during copying. À paper jam during continuous copying may cause the paper to jam in several places. The Paper] am Position screen indicates the positions of paper jams with arrows and the Paper Jam numbers. If paper jams have occurred in several places, the Paper J am numbers that need to be cleared with first priority will blink. Atthe same time, the appropriate action to be taken will be displayed at the top of the screen. The Paper] am Processing screen appears in the sequence ofthe required action each time the “GUIDE” key on the upper right of the Paper J am Position screen is touched. Touching the “EXIT” key on a Paper J am Processing screen returns you to the Paper J am Position screen. The Paper J am number goes off when the problem at that position is corrected. When all the problems are corrected, the Paper ] am Position screen goes off. See p. 12-6 to p. 12-11. Paper J am Position screen Paper J am Processing screen Power OFF/ON Screen Appears when any trouble affects the electric signal of the copier. See p. 12-12. Power OFF/ON screen Please switch ON/OFF Please tum OFF and ON. If $. Code still occurs, call service centre. LCD

Section 4 : LCD Operation 4. Other Screens (continued)

Key Operator Mode Screens Appear when the key operator accesses the Key Operator mode to modify machine settings or to monitor overall copier activity. To display the Key Operator Mode screen, turn the power ON while pressing the HELP button, then enter the 4-digit Key operator password on the Key Operator Password Entry screen. See p. 11-2 to p. 11-50. Key Operator Password Entry screen Key Operator Mode screen 1.évsten Initial Ddorier Initial AE HO. O.Heekly timer B.Lock Job memory _J[0.Touch panel adi le"

2. Electronic Key Counter (EKC)

How to Read the PM Count

Power Saver reduces energy consumption when a copier is not in use. We recommend to utilize this function. There are two modes for the Power Saver function as described below. Low power :The system conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing unit. This function provides compatibility of minimization of energy consumption and maximization of copying performance. Shut-off : The system conserves energy by partially turning OFF the power supply. The copying performance of this function is inferior to the Power saving, however, further energy conservation can be achieved. AN CAUTION During Power Saver mode the copier is still connected to the mains power supply and power is still applied to certain areas of machine. To avoid any unexpected troubles turn the power OFF when not using the copier for long periods of time. Auto Low Power If a certain period of time (selected from 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, and 240 minutes) has passed after completion ofthe last copy, with the copier kept ready for copying, power saving will work automatically. Initially, the mode is set to 15 minutes. The time setting of this function is set in the Key Operator mode. (See p. 11-43 -p. 11-44.) The message below is displayed on the LCD, the screen changes to the Basic screen, and the LCD becomes dark. The lamp ofthe POWER SAVER ON/OFF button remains dark. Low Power mode Press key/screen to cancel Advice e When the Paper] am Processing screen or the screen to wait for restarting copying is displayed, the Auto Low Power function will not work. e Ifthe Auto Shut-Off function is set before or at the same time that the Auto Low Power function is set, the Auto Low Power function will not work. Release of Auto Low Power Touch the screen or press any button on the Operation panel otherthanthe POWER SAVER ON/OFF button. The Auto Low Power function will be released and the LCD will restore its ordinary brightness.

1. Power Saver (continued)

Manual Shut-Off Press the POWER SAVER ON/OFF button. The lamp ofthe POWER SAVER ON/OFF button lights, other indicators are all turned off, and the LCD goes off. Advice When the Paper] am Processing screen or the screen to wait for restarting copying is displayed, the Power Saver will not work. Release of Manual Shut-Off Press the POWER SAVER ON/OFF button again. The Shut-off will be released. The lamp of the POWER SAVER ON/OFF button is turned off and the LCD will restore its ordinary brightness. STOPTCLENR Automatic Shut-Off If a certain period of time has passed after the last copy job was completed, and the copier is kept in “ready for copying mode”, the power will be automatically turned off if this function is selected. This function is initially set to 60 minutes. The automatic shut-off function can be set to “OFF” by the Key operator. The time to be selected for this function can be selected from 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, and 240 minutes by the Key operator. See p. 11-43 - p. 11-44. Advice - Auto Low Power and Auto Shut-Off When the Auto Low Power function operates before the Auto Shut-Off function starts operating, a copier turns to the Shut-Off state after a certain period of the Auto Low Power state is passed. Release of Automatic Shut-Off Press the POWER SAVER ON/OFF button. Power Saver

2. Electronic Key Counter (EKC)

The following describes the Electronic Key Counter functions and operations. The EKC function and any amendments to it are enabled in Key Operator mode. EKC Functions Copying is not performed unless the EKC password (a 5-digit number) is entered. The Key Operator specifies the copy limit for each EKC password so that any individual or group can control the print quantity with their own EKC password. EKC Password setting capacity : 256 max. EKC Password variation : 00001-99999 (The password “00000” cannot be entered.) Two or more EKC passwords ofthe same number can be entered, however, the firstentered EKC password only will be under control. EKC Procedure Enter EKC Password The copier having the copy count controlled by EKC passwords displays the following Exc passuords immediately after the power is turned on. The Warm-Up screens are not isplayed. Enter E.K.C. password Enter a 5-digit EKC password using the Ten keys of the Operation panel, and press the START PRINT button. Display Copy Count/Copy Limit The currentcopy countand copy limitforthe EKC password is displayed forthree seconds, and copying becomes available. Current count/limit 018888/025000 (3 seconds) Position original in the RADF face-up The screen will not be shown as described below if the entered EKC password is wrong. Having Problems? When the copy count reaches the copy limit, the following message is displayed and copying is not available. See p. 11-19 to p. 11-27 in “Section 11: Key O perator Mode”. Copy limit reached 025000/025000 Set Copy Conditions and Start Print Reset the EKC Password Press the CLEAR QTY. button while pressing P button. Copying will not be available until the new EKC password is entered. Please Be Reminded! For management of the copy count, be sure to have the message for entering EKC password displayed after you finish copying.

The Weekly timer function allows the copier to be turned on or off at a specified time by the key operator to disable copying during off time. For details, refer to p. 11-32 to p. 11-40 in “Section 11: Key Operator Mode”. EKC Week Timer When the copier has been set to the weekly timer function, the Weekly timer indicator on the right hand side of the operation panel will become lit. Please Be Reminded! When the Weekly timer indicator is lit, the copier will automatically be turned off. Do not turn it off by pressing the power switch. Timer Interrupt When the Weekly timer indicator is lit, and all the other indicators on the copier are unlit, copying is unavailable as the Weekly timer function has been activated. However, copying is available by following procedure. Procedure L Press the POWER SAVER ON/OFF button. 1} The Basic screen will be displayed, and the following noue message will be displayed. EroR Advice When the timer interrupt password is not entered, the message in step 3 is displayed. This password is not factory-entered. The timer interrupt

NTERRUPT password is entered by the key operator. See p. 11-40 in i] [6] x “Section 11: Key Operator Mode”. H] ro] Please wait Copier is warming up Timer interrupt mode Enter password

2. Enter a 4-digit number timer interrupt password using ES

the ten key on the operation panel. = x dl If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering O O PONT OR. the valid 4-digit password. Timer interrupt mode Enter password #4k%k

4, Enter a 1-digit hour (ex. 3 hour is 3) using the ten key on the operation panel. (0 — 9)

5. Press the START PRINT button.

6. Enter a 2-digit minutes (ex. 7 minutes is 07) using the ten

key on the Your copy time is 3 hour(s) 05 minute(s) operation panel. (05 - 60) Your copy time is 3 hour(s) 07 minute(s)

7. Press the START PRINT button.

Copying is When timer interrupt of the copier is finished, press the POWER SAVER ON/OFF button. The copier returns to the available until the set time is up. Position original in the RADF face up OFF state and copying is disabled.

Periodic Maintenance should be performed every 100,000 copies. The message below is displayed when thattime has arrived. Please contact your service centre and arrange for PM to be performed. Please call service for PM How to Read the PM Count The copy countfrom the previous periodic maintenance date to the present can be displayed to predict the next periodic maintenance date. Procedure 1 Press P button, then press “2” button of the Ten keys.

In order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep areas below clean. Clean the Platen Glass Use a clean, soft cloth to wipe dirt or marks from the glass surface. If it is difficult to clean, use a slightiy damp cloth. Please Be Reminded! Never use benzene, thinner or any other volatile liquid to clean them. Clean the Left Partition Glass The glass partition at the far left of the platen glass should be kept clean; otherwise soiled marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Clean the slit glass with a clean soft cloth. Clean the RADF Platen Guide Cover The RADF platen guide cover should be kept clean; otherwise soiled marks may be copied or document sizes may not be detected correctly. Wipe with a clean, soft cloth. Please Be Reminded! Never use benzene, thinner or any other volatile liquid to clean them.

2. Basic Operation for Copying

AE (Automatic Exposure) Manual Density Adjustment Density Shift

6. Paper Size Selection

Rotation and APS Rotation and AMS To Release Automatic Rotation

This section describes how to use the basic functions selected on the Basic screen.

When the machine becomes ready for copying after turning ON the Power switch, the Layer Selection screen will be displayed as Basic screen. Advice: Layer Selection Screen The Layer Selection screen can be displayed as the Basic screen. See the screen below, and see p. 4-4 for details. Advice During the process of successive copying jobs, the message “Copier is warming up” may be displayed in the message area ofthe Basic screen to maintain the copy image quality. @'SETTING" folder key D "RESERVE" folder key @ “Quality” key 40 ‘JOB LIST”key "SCAN" key (D Message area —] n origl EE -— 42 Output quantity/ É Enter quantity display @ Icon area — are ss MU < — (3 Memory indicator [sernme] ee = ES non = CE L'U=

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 1. Basic Screen (continued)

® Message area: Display the machine status and procedure required at that time. @) Icon area: Display the following icons. Add toner icon Displays when the toner supply becomes low. See p. 2-7 to p. 2-9. Periodic maintenance icon Displays when periodic maintenance is required. See p. 5-6. . Staple position icon OO Basic Screen Displays the staple position when staple-sort mode is selected. See p. 10-5. Finisher mode icon Displays the finisher mode selected on the Output Selection screen. Rotation icon Displays when the Rotation function is activated. Image quality icon Displays the quality selected on the Image Quality screen. The icon is usually displayed above the “QUALITY” key. See p. 7-18 to p. 7-22. APPLICATION icon Displays when any application function is selected on the Application Selection screen. The icon is usually displayed above the “RESERVE "folder key. See p. 8- 2 to p. 8-3. Job number icon (5 01] Displays the current output job number assigned to every job including reserve jobs. @ “COPY MODE” key: Touch to display the Copy Mode screen and select the copy mode (11,12, 22, and 2k 1). See p. 6-11 to p. 6-23. @) “COPY DENSITY” key: Touch to display the Density Adjustment screen and specify the manual density or userset density. ® “LENS MODE” key: Touch to display the Lens Mode screen and specify 1.00 (full size), Preset, Userset, Zoom, or Vertical/Horizontal zoom ratio. ® “PAPER SIZE” key: Touch to display the Tray Selection screen and selectthe desired paper size or AMS. ® “SETTING” folder key: Selected when the screen displays basic copying functions. Touch to return to Present copying job settings when making selection in Reserve mode. When any trouble occurs during the Reserve mode, the "SETTING” folder key changes to “| AM”or “ADD PAPER "according to the trouble type. The "SETTING "folder key also changes to “INTERRUPT” when the copier is set for the Interrupt mode by pressing the INTERRUPT button. ® “RESERVE” folder key: Touch to select copying conditions of subsequent job while the copier is busy scanning or printing. See p. 7-11 to p. 7-17. @) “QUALITY” key: Touch when selecting the image quality (Normal, High or Very high). 4 “J OB LIST” key: Touch to view the reserve job ofthe machine, or release the reserve job (see p. 7-15 to p. 7-16). 4 “SCAN” key: Touch to store the copy image (see p. 7-2 to p. 7-10). 42 Output quantity/Enter quantity display: Displays the print quantity entered with the keypad, and the output quantity on the left side of the print quantity while the copier is outputting the copied paper. 43 Memoryindicator: Displays the restofthe memory available to be used inthe operation (see p. 7-2 to p. 7-10).

2. Basic Operation for Copying

2. Basic Operation for Copying

This section describes the basic operation for copying with the Basic screen displayed. The Basic screen provides all the settings to complete an ordinary copying job. This section also describes how to minimize the toner consumption. Basic Copying Specifications RADF capacity : 50 sheets max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode. RADF original paper weight : 60 to 90g/m? Original size : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, ASR*, 8.5"x11"R Paper size for tray : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, ASR*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed ( [= ) only. Procedure Power Switch ON Press the Power switch to turn it ON. The Basic screen (Full-Automatic Mode screen or Layer Selection screen) displays after the Wake-Up screen. Having Problems? When you cannot turn the copier ON, confirm the main power switch on the left rear side of the main body is turned on. If not, turn it ON. Please Be Reminded! When turning the copier power OFF then ON, wait for 3 seconds or longer before turn it ON again; otherwise the copier may not function normally. Having Problems? If you find the weekly timerindicator is alightand the copier appears OFF although the Power switch is already ON, this is because the weekly timeris in operation. The copier will be turned ON atthe programmed time automatically. See p. 5-5 and p. 11-32 to p. 11-40. Please Be Reminded! Do not turn off the power switch when the weekly timer indicator is alight, or the weekly timer will not function correctly.

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 2. Basic Operation for Copying (continued)

The message ‘Please wait Copier is warming up”is displayed in the message area ofthe Basic screen. The warm-up takes about 1 minute and 30 seconds during which you can operate scanning originals placed in the RADF or onto the platen glass by pressing the START PRINT button. When copying becomes available, the message area displays “Position original in the RADF face-up”. Basic screen (Warm-up) Basic screen (Ready to copy) mon

Advice + To display the Layer Selection screen initially as the Basic screen, contact your Service Centre. See p. 4-4. + The settings on the Basic screen displayed after switching on the power can be customized by your Key operator. See p. 11-8 to p. 11-15 in “Section 11: Key Operator Mode”. Having Problems? While the copier is under the control ofthe following functions, copying is notavailable. BEKC (Electronic Key Counter) When the message “Enter E.K.C. password”is displayed, copying is not available until a 5-digit password is entered. See p. 5-4. HKey counter When the message ‘Please insertkey counter”is displayed, copying is notavailable until the key counter is set. Set Copying Conditions Basic screen Code : Normal ginal in the RADF RADF :ON Ha Copy density :AE ON (Rés) QuauTy J(uo8 usr]( scan | Lens mode :1.00 (full-size) CINE LOC EN | NS Paper size : APS ON MN ut-uowrcvoæ [N pinisher . : ON (option) rint quanti : Output rudes : Sort, Face down

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 2. Basic Operation for Copying (continued)

The standard copying conditions are set as follows. When an original is set on the platen glass with RADF opened, RADF mode is turned off. For copying under your desired conditions, see the description ofeach operation given later. Advice for minimizing toner consumption + Frame/Fold erasure allows you to obtain copies with less black shading around the edges, and at the centre, from a thick original such as a book. For Frame/Fold erasure, see p. 9-15 to p. 9-18. + When copying thick originals such as books, use Non-image area erase to minimize toner usage. See p. 9-36 to p. 9-39. Select Output Mode Press the OUTPUT button to display the Output screen. Output screen (Copier without Finisher) Select Operation panel

For a copier without the Finisher: The default setting is the Sort mode without E-sort and Face up. Advice: E-Sort Exit This mode rotates every second finished set by 90° upon exit to the tray, only when either combination of A4 and A4R, B5 and B5R, or 8.5"x11" and 8.5"x11"R size copy paper is loaded into separate trays including the Multi-sheet bypass tray. See p. 7-40 to p. 7-41 for details. Advice: Face UP Exit In the Face Up exit, the copies exit to the exit tray in the reverse order, with simplex sheets and odd numbered duplex sheets face up.

1. To select Sort with E-sort exit, touch ‘E-Sort”.

To select Group with normal exit, touch “GROUP”. To select Group with E-sort exit, touch “E-Sort” and “GROUP”. To select Face Up, touch “FaceUp”.

2. When copying onto the large-sized copy paper, withdraw

the left edge of the paper exit tray. CANCEL

2. Basic Operation for Copying (continued)

For a copier with the Finisher: Operation panel

Output screen (Copier with Finisher) The default setting is the Non-sort mode discharged on the TRAY 2 (Finisher middle exit tray). Advice: Sort/Group mode of a copier with the Finisher Use the Sort mode to output multiple copies of the originals and to have each finished set offset by 30 mm upon exit. Use the Group mode to group together multiple copies of each original and offset the finished sets by 30 mm upon exit. Non-sort mode will not offset the finished sets. Select the desired mode using the Output screen. See p. 10-2 for details. Enter Print Quantity Press the Keypad to enter the number of copies required. The entered quantity will be displayed on the upper right position of the Basic screen. To change the print quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! Do notpress the STOP/CLEAR button. The image stored in the memory will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel DATA ERROR

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 2. Basic Operation for Copying (continued)

. Arrange the single-sided originals in . Adjust the paper guides to originals. ing RADF: originals FACE UP Close the RADF securely. order, with page 1 on top. Place originals with their FACE UP. Using Platen glass: original FACE DOWN

Open the RADF. Place original FACE DOWN, aligning original to the left measuring guide. Setthe centre of the original to the centre of the measuring guide. Gently close the RADF. Advice Do not close the RADF, when selecting the Non-image area erase or Auto layout. Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF/Platen store mode is available. See p. 7-2 to 7-10 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies

Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen. Touch “PROOF COPY” on the Check screen to make a proof copy. When completed, touch “EXIT” to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details.

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 2. Basic Operation for Copying (continued)

Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. TE POWER SAVER Advice During the process of successive copying jobs, the message “Copier is warming up” may be displayed in the message area of the Basic screen to maintain the copy image quality.

Memory indicator allows you to checkthe remaining memory while the copier is scanning in the job. The current output quantity is displayed on the left hand side of the print quantity while copying is in progress. Basic screen STOP/CLEAR button Press the STOP/CLEAR button to suspend the copying job at any time. Scanned data in the memory will be cleared. INTERRUPT button Press the INTERRUPT button to perform another job during printing or scanning job in progress. Refer to p. 7-36 to p. 7-38 for details. Having Problems? Copying is not available if the copy paper ofthe same size as the original is notloaded. Set the paper of the size indicated in the message into the tray. Advice: Paper Exit Switching Function of Finisher Exit Tray When the amount of copies delivered onto the Finisher exit tray (upper, middle or lower) exceeds its limit described below, the copier automatically shifts the output to another tray to complete the output job. Finisher upper exit tray: After 100 sheets (irrespective of the paper size) delivery, the output shifts to the middle, then lower tray. Finisher middle exit tray: After 300 sheets (A3, B4 or F4/8.5"x13")/500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"X1IR or 8.5"x11") delivery, the output shifts to the lower tray. Finisher lower exit tray: After 300 sheets (A3, B4 or F4/8.5"x13")/500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"x1IR or 8.5"x11") delivery, the output shifts to the middle tray. 6-9 | Basic Operation

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 2. Basic Operation for Copying (continued)

le” Advice: Automatic Stop on Exit Tray The copier without Finisher automatically stops to output when the number of copies delivered onto the exit tray reaches 100 during one output job. If you desire to release this function, contact your Service Centre. AA CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. Non-Sort Mode Tray 1 : 100 sheets/10 sheets (thin/thick paper, transparency film, etc.) Tray 2/3 : 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x1l"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8"x13", A5R*) Sort/Group Mode Tray 2/3 : 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x1l"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8"x13") Staple-Sort Mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8"x13", A5R*)

• Load A5 in horizontal feed ([_) only. JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray The exittray ity is 100 sheets. If a copy run of more than 100 is requi be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam.

Under the copying conditions of the Basic screen, the Copy mode is automatically set at “p1" Take the following procedure to set the copy mode. 132 Copying Single-sided originals are automatically copied onto both sides of the paper. — Konica] |7040 Konica 7040 Konica 7040 | — Konica 7040 Konica 7040 1-sided originals Duplex copying Basic rules for 1 2 copying mode Place the originals onto the RADF. When making double-sided copy using the platen glass, see “1 2 Copying by Using the Platen Glass” (p. 6-20 to p. 6-23). 132 Copying Specifications RADF to be used RADF capacity : 50 sheets max. 1,500 image max. can be scanned at a time using RADF store mode. Original : A3, B4, A4R, F4/8.5"x13", A4, B5R, B5, ASR*, 8.5"x11" (60 to 90g/m? paper) Copy paper : A3, B4, AGR, F4/8.5"x13", A4, B5R, B5, A5R*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (11) only. Incompatible Image quality (Very high) Thin/Thick paper OHP interleave

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

Procedure Set Copy Conditions L Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button on the operation panel to setthe RADF mode.

2. Touch “COPY MODE” on the Basic screen to display the Copy Mode screen.

3. Touch “1-2”. The “1-2” key will be highlighted, then touch “OK”to return to the Basic

4. As required, set the other copying conditions.

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to setthe desired print quantity. Enter the desired number of copied set, using the Ten keys on the Operation panel. To change the print quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enterthe correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DA ERROR O O P ORY 100 Qoa G Ce es min mm

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

Place Originals … FACE UP 1 Putthe single-sided originals in the order _ of pages. Place originals FACE UP in A the RADF.Up to 50 originals can be set.

2. Align the front paper guide to the

originals. Advice For the details of setting originals to the RADF, see p. 6-8. Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF Store Mode: To copy a set of more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode. See p. 7-8 to p. 7-10 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Platen Store Mode: To copy originals that cannot be fed through the RADF onto both sides of copy paper, use the Platen store mode. See “1B 2 Copying by Using the Platen Glass” on p. 6-20 to p. 6-23 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

7. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on RADF [eme DT are all scanned and discharged, then printing job starts in | © OM OFF succession. To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Memory settings will be cleared. After completion of copying, all memory settings are cleared. Press the AUTO RESET button to return to the )] [e] à initial condition. 4m

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

2} 2 Copying Double-sided originals are automatically copied onto both sides of the paper. 2-sided originals Duplex copying Basic rules for 2} 2 copying mode Place the originals onto the RADF. When making double-sided copy using the platen glass, see “1 2 Copying by Using the Platen Glass” (p. 6-20 to p. 6-23). 22 Comying Specifications RADF to be used RADF capacity : 50 sheets max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode. Original : A3, B4, A4R, F4/8.5"x13", A4, B5R, B5, ASR*, 8.5"x11" (60 to 90g/m° paper) Copy paper : A3, B4, A4R, F4/8.5"x13", A4, B5R, B5, A5R*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (11) only. Incompatible Image quality (Very high) Auto layout OHP interleave Thin/Thick paper Dual page Non-image area erase Repeat Le"

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

Procedure Set Copy Conditions L Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to set the RADF mode.

2. Touch “COPY MODE” on Basic screen to display the Copy Mode screen.

3. Touch "2-2". The “2-2” key will be highlighted, then touch “OK”to return to the Basic

screen. Advice To return to the original condition set before change, touch “CANCEL”. Basic screen fuit EE DC: mc UE

4. As required, set the other copying conditions.

Enter Print Quantity Press the keypad to set the desired print quantity. Enter the desired number of copied set, using the Ten keys on the operation panel. To change the print quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enterthe correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen BNENEIE = RREREee |] Has [S eee Ê ro = Of J (ellolfe] Li

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

Place Originals … FACE UP L Putthe double-sided originals in the order of pages. Place originals FACE UP in the RADF. Up to 50 originals can be set.

2. Align the front paper guide to the

originals. Advice For the details of setting originals to the RADF, see p. 6-8. Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF Store Mode: To copy a set of more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode. See p. 7-5 to p. 7-6 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Platen Store Mode: To copy originals that cannot be fed through the RADF onto both sides of copy paper, use the Platen store mode. See “1 2 Copying by Using the Platen Glass” on p. 6-20 to p. 6-23 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen. . Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on RADF | ensor are all scanned and discharged, then printing job starts in | © succession. FONER SAVER To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Memory settings will be cleared. After completion of copying, all memory settings are cleared. Press the AUTO RESET button to return to the A initial condition. um SH

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

2} 1 Copying Double-sided originals are automatically copied onto single-sided paper. Konica! 7040 Konica 7040 Konica 7040 Konica 7040 Konica 7040 2-sided originals Simplex copying Basic rules for 2} 1 copying mode Place the originals onto the RADF. 2} 1 Copying Specifications RADF to be used RADF capacity : 50 sheets max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode Original : A3, B4, A4R, F4/8.5"x13", A4, B5R, B5, ASR*, 8.5"x11" (60 to 90g/m? paper) Copy paper : A3, B4, AGR, F4/8.5"x13", A4, B5R, B5, A5R*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible Image quality (Very high) Repeat Chapter Auto layout Booklet Non-image area erase Dual page

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

Procedure Set Copy Conditions L Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to set the RADF mode.

2. Touch “COPY MODE” on the Basic screen to display the Copy Mode screen.

3. Touch “2-1”. The “2-1” key will be highlighted, then touch the “OK” to return to the

4. As required, set the other copying conditions.

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to setthe desired print quantity. Enter the desired number of copied set, using the Ten keys on the Operation panel. To change the print quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enterthe correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR ETS e) © FOWE

GIFS LS ŒwIloife] dE. SH

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

Place Originals … FACE UP L Putthe double-sided originals in the order of pages. Place originals FACE UP in the RADF. Up to 50 originals can be set.

2. Align the front paper guide to the

originals. Advice For the details of setting originals to the RADF, see p. 6-8. Copy Mode Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF Store Mode: To copy a set of more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode. See p. 7-8 to p. 7-10 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Platen Store Mode: To copy originals that cannot be fed through the RADF onto both sides of copy paper, use the Platen store mode. See “1B 2 Copying by Using the Platen Glass” on p. 6-20 to p. 6-23 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies 1 Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on RADF [error are all scanned and discharged, then printing job starts in | © RES succession.

To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Memory ] [s] settings will be cleared. After completion of copying, all memory settings are HE] cleared. Press the AUTO RESET button to return to the initial condition. HLs) 5 @ æ cEnqn

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

13 2 Copying by Using the Platen Glass How to copy originals not suitable for the RADF in duplex mode, is described below. Origin:

NS === =—— Curled, creased of Paste-ups or folded originals cut-outs Books n NENEZ7 5 6 7 7. HE Glossy or transparent originals, OHP film, Doubled, punched or Thin or thick originals art paper, cellophane stapled originals 132 Copying by Using the Platen Glass Specifications Scanned image capacity : 1,500 image max. at a time Original paper sizes : A3 max. Copy paper sizes :A3, B4, A4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, B5R, B5, A5SR*, 8.5"X11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (11) only. Incompatible Image quality (Very high) Image insert OHP interleave Thin/Thick paper

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 3. Copy Mode (continued)

Procedure Set Copy Conditions

Open and close the RADF to set the Platen mode. Touch “COPY MODE” on the Basic screen to display the Copy Mode screen. “2-2” and “2-1” keys is dimmed. Touch “1-2”. The “1-2”key will be highlighted, then touch “OK”to return to the Basic screen. Advice To return to the original condition set before change, touch “CANCEL” key. Basic screen ginal in te RADR fuit EE DC: mc UE ne Henecduenhrerer see ORIGINAL CANCEL.

4. As required, set the other copying conditions.

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to setthe desired print quantity. Enter the desired number of copied set, using the Ten keys on the Operation panel. To change the print quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enterthe correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR EIAIENE el 1.00 EC x EI] AG] ET dE SA Copy Mode

2. Place the original FACE DOWN, adjusting the centre ofthe original to the centre of

the left side scale of the Platen glass.

3. Gently close the RADF.

Advice For details of how to place the original, see p. 6-8. Please Be Reminded! Place from the first page.

4. Touch “SCAN” to scan the image for the front side of copy.

Open the RADF. Place the original FACE DOWN, adjusting the centre ofthe original to the centre of the left side scale of the Platen glass.

3. Gently close the RADF.

Le” Touch “SCAN” to scan the image for the reverse side of copy. Basic screen

3. Copy Mode (continued)

E Store Data into Memory Repeat steps [I and El. The memory remaining will be displayed on the memory indicator in the upper right portion of the Basic screen. Basic screen Memory indicator LENS DENSITY HIMODI

Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. To delete the scanned data without printing, press the STOP/CLEAR button. To reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press the STOP/CLEAR button then AUTO RESET button. Supplement Checking copying conditions/printed copies Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

7. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. All scanned images are copied in succession. To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Memory settings will be cleared. After completion of copying, all memory settings are cleared. Press the AUTO RESET button to return to the initial condition. POWER SAVER “Ê] Copy Mode

This section describes the following functions of copy density and their operational procedures.

• AE (Automatic Exposure) + Manual Density Adjustment + Density Shift AE (Automatic Exposure) The AE detects the density ofthe original and automatically selects the appropriate density for copying. Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica | =). Konica | Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Procedure Press the AUTO RESET button. The “AE "indication on the Basic screen is displayed brightly. Operation panel Basic screen para

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 4. Copy Density (continued)

Manual Density Adjustment Manual setting is used to set the density either lighter or darker than the density setting selected automatically by the AE mode. Density adjustment can be made in 9 steps. Procedure L Touch “COPY DENSITY” on the Basic screen to display the Density Adjustment screen.

2. Touch one ofthe four keys on DARKER side, or ofthe four keys on LIGHTER side.

The key touched will be highlighted, then touch “OK” to return to the Basic screen. Copy Density Basic screen fuit en Li mu FOR CUSTOM EE FOTION PRESS KEVS BEM cs Lo Gi Des cou M RES To use the AE mode, touch the “AE” on the Density Adjustment screen. Fe]

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 4. Copy Density (continued)

Density Shift Density shift divides each of seven density levels into two levels oflighter and three levels of darker. Density shift can be used not only in normal copying (Normal mode) but in each of the following three modes of Text/P hoto Enhance. See p. 9-2 to p. 9-5. «Text Photo

• Increase contrast Density shift 0 => Density shift 1 ==> Density shift 2 => Density shift 3 (standard) <= Density shift 4 <= Density shift5 Procedure L Selectthe density mode. To select the Text/Photo mode, press P button and 5 button simultaneously. The following message will be displayed. P - mode :5 Press START to confirm To select the Text mode, press p button and 6 button simultaneously. The following message will be displayed. P - mode : 6 Press START to confirm To select the Photo mode, press P button and 7 button simultaneously. The following message will be displayed. P - mode : 7 Press START to confirm To selectthe Increase contrast mode, press p button and 8 button simultaneously. The following message will be displayed. P - mode : 8 Press START to confirm

4. Copy Density (continued)

Press any key (from 0 - 5) using the Ten keys to determine the Density shift. Advice When 6 or above is entered, 5 is selected.

4. Press the STOP/CLEAR button. Density shift is determined.

In the copying conditions of the Basic screen, the magnification is automatically set at “1.00” (full-size). The following describes how to change the magnification ratio. Selectone ofthe four magnification modes, and specify the desired magnification ratio or copy paper size. 6 Preset ratios : 0.71, 0.82, 0.86, 1.15, 1.22, and 1.41 Zoom : 0.25 to 4.00 in 1 % increments 3 Userset ratios : Programmable by key operator and selected from 0.25 to

Vertical/Horizontal zoom: reduction orenlargement vertical and horizontal dimensions independently. Incompatible with change of magnification (Preset/User Set/Zoom) Reduce & shift Preset/Userset As Preset ratios, the six frequently used magnification ratios (0.71, 0.82, 0.86, 1.15, 1.22, 1.41) are provided, and three User Setratios that can be optionally set are also available. Advice For setting the User Set ratios, see “Section 11: Key Operator Mode” at p.11-19. Procedure L Touch “LENS MODE" on the Basic screen to display the Lens Mode screen.

2. Touch the desired one of the six "PRESET” keys and three “USERSET” keys. The

touched key will be reversed, then touch “OK” to return to the Basic screen. Advice To return to the original condition set before change, touch “CANCEL”. For full-size copying, touch “1.00”. Basic screen fuit EE DC: mc UE

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 5. Magnification (continued)

Zoom This is used to make copies with magnification ratios other than the Preset or User Set ratios. Zoom ratio can be set in 0.01 increments from 0.25 to 4.00. Advice In the case of the Very high mode, Zoom magnification can be set from 0.50 to 4.00. Procedure

Touch “LENS MODE” on the Basic screen to display the Lens Mode screen. Touch “ZOOM” on the Lens Mode screen to display the Zoom screen. Setthe zoom ratio, by either of the following two methods: + Change the ratio in 0.01 (1%) steps by keeping A pressed for enlargement, or keeping w pressed for reduction. + Enter the numeral of the magnification ratio by touching the corresponding Ten keys on the screen. The magnification ratio will be displayed on the right side of the screen. Advice To return to the original condition set before change, touch “CANCEL”. Touch “OK” on the Zoom screen. The Basic screen will be restored. Lens Mode screen Basic screen AM A 6 + 14 fuit EE DC: mc UE

CANCEL | K | “P] Magnification

5. Magnification (continued)

Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Use the Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or enlarge vertical and horizontal dimensions, independently. incompatible with Vertical/Horizontal zoom Change magnification APS AMS Vertical ratio: 0.25 — 4.00 Horizontal ratio: 0.25 - 4.00 Advice In the case ofthe Very high mode, Zoom ratio can be set from 0.50 to 4.00. Length The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom. Length: 0.50, Width: 0.50 Length: 0.50, Width: 1.00 Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00 Length: 0.50, Width: 4.00 Width Length Konica one Length: 1.00, Width: 0.50 Length: 1.00, Width: 1.00 Length: 1.00, Width: 2.00 Length: 1.00, Width: 4.00 Konica Konica Konica Length: 2.00, Widih: 0,50 Lengin:2.00, Width: 1.00 Length:2.00, Width: 2.00 Length: 2.00, Width: 4.00

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 5. Magnification (continued)

5. Magnification (continued)

The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom with an original placed slant on the platen glass.

Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00 Length: 2.00, Width: 0.50 messe =

Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00 Length: 2.00, Width: 0.50

6. Paper Size Selection

When originals are set with the paper size set, AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) works. The setoriginal size will be detected and the optimum magnification for the detected original size and the set paper size will be automatically selected for copying. Incompatible with AMS Change magnification Repeat (PRESET/USERSET/ZOOM) Auto layout APS Non image area erase Dual page Magnification Paper Size Procedure 1 Touch “PAPER SIZE” key on the Basic screen to display the Tray Selection screen.

2. Touch the key of the desired copy size. The touched key will be reversed.

For automatically selecting the paper ofthe same size as the original, touch “APS”. It automatically returns to the Basic screen. Advice To return to the original condition set before change, touch “CANCEL”. Before selecting performed ratio automatically, the “-A-" will be displayed on the Basic screen. Basic screen ginal in te RADR Tray Selection screen FOR CUSTOM EE FOTION PRESS KEVS BEM cs Lo Gi Des cou M RES Fe]

This copier has many automatic functions to make copying easier. The automation has also been made for energy conservation and safety in operation. The following describes the automatically set functions. ATS (Automatic Tray Switching) ATS detects the copy paper of the same size loaded in another tray, when the selected drawer becomes empty while copying is in progress. When the paper is detected, ATS automatically switches the tray to continue copying without interruption. ATS is notinstalled at the initial setting. Refer to p. 11-45 to p. 11-48 in “Section 11: Key Operator Mode”, if required. ATS can be set to detect all trays or any specific trays. The Sheet bypass tray is not included in ATS detection. APS (Automatic Paper Size Selection) APS detects the size of originals placed on RADF or the platen glass, and automatically selects and feeds the copy paper of the same size as the original in 1:1 mode, or ofthe appropriate size when magnification ratio is selected at that time. Ifthe copy paper of the automatically selected size is not loaded in any tray, no copying willbe made, and the message requesting to load the paper of that size will be displayed. The sizes of originals which can be detected are: A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R,B5, A5R. The relation of original size, magnification ratio and copy paper size is listed below. The Sheet bypass tray is not included in APS detection. Copy paper size Original size A3 | 54 [F4BS5XI3) A4R | A4 | B5R | 55 | AR 033-042) B6R 043-050) a58 | OR | B6R 0.51-0.55 AR B6R B6R 0.56- 0.57] B5R (B5| 85 ser 0.58- 0.61 B5R | A5R (BSR) a < L0.62-071[ am (85) AR (B5R) S$ [072-0178 AR | B5SR (B5) Ë [079-082] 84 | (A4) re ASR $ [0.83-0.86 AGR (A4)

{Dis size of Rotation. Advice + The APS feature can be released when original is placed on the platen glass. Refer to p. 11-45 to p. 11-48 in “Section 11: Key Operator Mode”. *_In addition to À and B sizes, APS also detects an inch size (8.5"x11"R). Though the sizes of originals which can be detected are A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, | 6-34 A4, B5R and B5, A5 can be detected instead of B5R. Contact your Service Centre.

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 7. Automatic Settings (continued)

AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) AMS automatically selects the appropriate magnification ratio, after originals are placed on RADF or the platen glass and the copy paper size is selected by touching “PAPER SIZE” key on the Basic screen. The relation of original size, copy paper size and automatically selected magnification is listed below. Original size A3 B4 F485x13" | A4R B5R |8.5"x11"| A4 B5 A5R A3 1.00 115 127 141 1.63 - 1.00 115 231 B4 0.86 1.00 1.10 122 1.41 - 0.86 1.00 2.00 F4/8.5"x13" 0.71 0.82 1.00 1.00 1.15 - 0.71 (1.00) 0.82 (115) 1.41 A4R 0.71 0.82 0.90 1.00 115 - 0.71(1.00) 0.82 (115) 1.63 gIB5R 0.61 | 0.71 0.78 | 0.86 | 1.00 = |[061(0.86/0.71(100| 1.41 Er ë A4 0.50 (0.71)| 0.58 (0.82) | 0.64 (0.90)| 0.71 (1.00)| 0.82 (1.15) - 1.00 115 115 ô B5 0.50 (0.61)| 0.50 (0.71) | 0.55 (0.78) 0.61 (0.86)| 0.71 (1.00) - 0.86 1.00 1.00 AS 0.50 0.58 0.64 0.71 0.82 - 0.50 0.58 1.00 8.5"x14" - - - - - 0.77 = - - 8.5"x11"R - - - - - 0.77 = - - 8.5"x11" - - - - - 1.00 = - - {_}is magnification ratio of Rotation. Auto Reset Ifa certain time (selected from 30 seconds, 1 minute, 1.5 minutes, 2 minutes, 2.5 minutes, 3 minutes, 3.5 minutes, 4 minutes, 4.5 minutes, 5 minutes and no setting) has passed without any button pressed after completion of copying, the copying conditions will be reset to those on the Basic screen. To change the time or to cancel the Auto Reset, see p. 11-45 to p. 11-48 in “Section 11: Key Operator Mode”. AE (Automatic Exposure) AE is a copy function that detects the density of the set original and automatically selects the appropriate exposure level. Fe]

This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original size documents described below onto size A4, B5 or 8.5"x11"R, irrespective of the copy paper loading direction. By default, Rotation requires APS or AMS to function; however, the key operator may set the function to always function or never function. See p. 11-45 to p. 11-48. Rotation Specifications Rotation copying uses memory. Copy size : A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5"X11"R Original size : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4, A4R, B5, B5R, AR (horizontal feed ( [1 ) only), 8.5"x11" Incompatible Image quality (Very high) Auto layout Dual page Non image area erase Repeat Rotation and APS In APS, the copier automatically make à copy onto the paper of the same size as the placed original(s) by 1:1. For example, when size A4 copy paper is loaded in the tray horizontally and the copier detects that the original is placed vertically, Rotation and APS function together to rotate the original image by 90° and output the A4 copy in the horizontal direction to match the direction of the copy paper. Original Copy paper Rotation and APS

Le L Similarly, when size A4 copy paper is loaded in the tray vertically and the copier detects that the original is placed horizontally, Rotation and APS function together to rotate the original image by 90° and outputthe A4 copy in the vertical direction to match the direction of the copy paper. Original Copy paper Rotation and APS DTA) mp IE) same | FAUNE Le"

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 8. Rotation (continued)

Rotation and AMS Forexample, when size A4 copy paperis loaded in the tray horizontally and copier detects thatthe original is placed vertically, Rotation (if required) rotates the original image by 90° and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fitthe vertical direction ofthe copy paper. Original Copy paper Rotation and AMS AMS only

Similarly, when size A4 copy paper is loaded in the tray vertically and the copier detects that the original is placed horizontally, Rotation (if required) rotates the original image by 90° and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fitthe vertical direction ofthe copy paper. Konica Rotation Original Copy paper Rotation and AMS AMS only BREST

When the B5 tray is selected and the copier detects that the original is placed vertically, Rotation rotates the original image by 90° and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fitthe horizontal direction of the copy paper. BSIUOX Original Copy paper Rotation and AMS AMS only

Section 6 : Basic Copying on Basic Screen 8. Rotation (continued)

To Release Automatic Rotation The copieris initially setto activate the Rotation function automatically, and the key operator can switch it ON/OFF in Key Operator Mode. In this case, the Rotation icon will be displayed at the upper left corner of the screen. To release automatic Rotation Press the OUTPUT button to display the Output screen. And then touch “AUTO” under the AUTO ROTATION not to be highlighted . The Rotation icon will disappear. To recover automatic Rotation Press the OUTPUT button to display the Output screen. And then touch “AUTO” key under the AUT ROTATION to be highlighted. The Rotation icon will be displayed. Output screen (Copier with Finisher) Output screen (Copier without Finisher) | TRAY8 | (AUTO ROTATION] Le fs A | £ JE AUTO ROTATION SORT CACEL _K CANCEL le"

2. Reserve Mode and J ob List

Reserve ] ob Setting Job List Screen Troubleshooting in Reserve Setting

Check Screen and How to Make a Proof Copy How to View the Check Screen

Help Basic Screen Help Screens for the Output Modes Help Screens for the ] ob Memory Help Screen for the Paper J am Position Screen Help Screens for Manual Setting on the Basic Screen Help Screens for the Application Selection Screen 6.] OB MEMORY Button JOB STORE JOB RECALL

Store mode allows you to scan multiple originals by touching “SCAN” key on the Basic screen, and then output the complete set by pressing START PRINT button. Store mode features two modes as described below. + Platen store mode using platen glass to scan originals + RADF store mode using RADF to scan originals Using Store mode in Basic copying Touch “SCAN” key to scan originals and store the data into memory, then press the START PRINT button to start the output job. Basic screen [sernne] Copying in 1k 2 mode using platen glass always requires the Store mode. The printing job will be collective in the following conditions as well as in the Store mode, however, scanning and printing will be performed in succession simply by pressing the START PRINT button. Although the RADF capacity is 50 sheets max., more originals can be operated at a time by using Store mode in combination with the following conditions. *1b1 *1»2 *2b2 *2R1 Using Store mode with Applications Touch “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen to highlight it, then touch “OK” key. Operate the same as above to scan and start printing. Application Selection screen Basic screen tion Function FILE EDIT CANCEL

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 1. Store Mode (continued)

The following application functions require the Store mode using platen glass. When these are selected, the message to touch “SCAN” key will be displayed.

• Image insert + Dual page The printing job will be collective in the following conditions as well as in the Store mode, however, scanning and printing will be performed in succession simply by pressing the START PRINT button. Although the RADF capacity is 50 sheets max., more originals can be operated at a time by using Store mode in combination with the following conditions. + Sheet/Cover insertion + Booklet Advice After scanning the original, the magnification ratio can be changed before pressing the START PRINT button for printing all the page collectively. When selecting the Dual page or Image insert, the magnification ratio can be changed before pressing the START PRINT button for printing all the page collectively. Please Be Reminded When using Store mode with application functions, be sure to touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen; otherwise the copier will not start scanning even though the “SCAN” key is touched. Advice If Memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre. Store mode Specifications Memory capacity : 1500 images max. at a time Original size : A3, B4,F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5SR*, 8.5"x11"R Paper size fortray : A3,B4,F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*, 8.5"X11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sheets max. Advice *: A5 is available in horizontal feed (13) only. Incompatible Image quality (Very high) Store Mode

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 1. Store Mode (continued)

Platen Store Mode Use the Platen store mode for originals that cannot be fed through the document feeder due to thickness, size or condition. When scanning thick originals that require keeping the RADF open, select Non image area erase to prevent exposure of the glass area around the border of the original. This feature ensures a clean copy result, and reduces toner consumption. The Non image area erase mode automatically releases when the RADF is closed. Additional images may be scanned. Procedure Set Copying Conditions Make required copying selection, and select 1 1 or 12 copy mode. When selecting any of the Applications, check that the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen is highlighted. If not, touch the key to highlight it. Touch “OK” to return to the Basic screen. Application Selection screen on Function Please Be Reminded! When using Store mode with application functions, be sure to touch and highlightthe “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen; otherwise the copier will not start scanning even though the “SCAN” key is touched.

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 1. Store Mode (continued)

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Basic screen Operation panel DATA Enron

Please Be Reminded! Place and scan the originals in regular order of pagination.

Please Be Reminded! When the AUTO layout or Non image area erase is selected, do not close RADF. Store Mode

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 1. Store Mode (continued)

Scan Original(s) Touch “SCAN” on the Basic screen. The copier starts scanning the set original. Basic screen LIGHTER] Having Problems? The copier may not start scanning in some copying conditions. In this case, confirm that the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen is highlighted. If not, touch “Store Mode” to highlight it. Store in Memory Repeat steps [I to EX. The remaining memory will be displayed on the Memory indicator in the upper right position of the Basic screen. Basic screen Memory indicator (Eu) Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button. Stored image will be cleared. To delete the scanned data without printing, press the STOP/CLEAR button. To delete the data and reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press the STOP/CLEAR and AUTO RESET buttons in order.

1. Store Mode (continued)

Supplement: Checking copying conditions/printed copies L Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY" on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. The copier starts the printing job. To stop printing, press the STOP/CLEAR button. This action also clears all the scanned data. After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. Press the AUTO RESET button to return to the initial condition.

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 1. Store Mode (continued)

RADF Store Mode Use this feature to scan more than 50 originals into memory from the RADF. Use this function in conjunction with the Reserve function to increase efficiency ofthe copying job. Procedure Set Copying Conditions L Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to set the RADF mode.

2. When selecting any of the Applications, check that the “Store Mode” key on the

Application Selection screen is highlighted. If not, touch the key to highlight it. Touch “OK” to return to the Basic screen. Application Selection screen ation Function CANEL Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to setthe desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Basic screen Operation panel \ginal in the R + E fr = 0 Ga CE [] ClAIs) LS or To : co = Re CF] [o] [ce] DARKER B4 ET dm 5x cena Muane PAPER size

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 1. Store Mode (continued)

Place Originals...FACE UP L Putoriginals in order of pagination.

2. Place originals FACE UP in the RADF.

If the number of originals exceeds 50, divide them into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page.

3. Align the original guides to the originals.

FACE UP Store Mode Scan Original(s) Touch “SCAN” on the Basic screen. The copier starts scanning the set originals. Basic screen recent |

Ba) IDD Cor Having Problems? The copier may not start scanning in some copying conditions. In this case, confirm that the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen is highlighted. If not, touch “Store Mode” to highlight it.

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 1. Store Mode (continued)

Store in Memory When scanning more than 50 originals at a time, repeat steps El to El. The remaining memory will be displayed on the Memory indicator in the upper right position of the Basic screen. Basic screen Memory indicator Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button. Stored image will be cleared. To delete the scanned data without printing, press the STOP/CLEAR button. To delete the data and reset the copying conditions to the initial setting, press the STOP/CLEAR and AUTO RESET buttons in order. Supplement: Checking copying conditions/printed copies L Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. The copier starts the | ennon printing job. oO POWER SAVER Tostop printing, press the STOP/CLEAR button. This action jl G1 also clears all the scanned data. i] [6] After completion of copying, all the data in the memory is ] [El cleared. Press the AUTO RESET button to return to the initial condition. ilLe] à

2. Reserve Mode and J ob List

2. Reserve Mode and J ob List

The Reserve function allows you to start copying the reserve job immediately after the present output job is completed. While the present output job is printing/copying, you can set up the reserve job so thatthe copier reads in the original image(s) and waits until the present output job is completed. This section describes the procedure ofthis function and troubleshooting during the reserve job setting. Basic rules for Reserve mode

• The present output job should be using either the RADF or Store mode for collective printing. + Max. 5 jobs can be set. Reserve Specifications Job settings Reserve job setting timing : To change Reserve order: To delete Reserve job : Max. 5 (output job plus 4 reserve jobs) The reserve job is available to be set afterthe copier starts to scan for the output job. When setting more than one reserve job, the next reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to scan for the previous reserve job. When the output job is under Store mode, Image insert, or Dual page, the reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to print the output job. The order of the reserve jobs can be altered on the Job List screen. : The reserve jobs can be deleted on the Job List screen. Incompatible with Reserve E-sort Interrupt Store mode Proof copy Image quality (Very high) Booklet Image insert APS mode in Mixed original T°] Store Mode Fat

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 2. Reserve Mode and J ob List (continued)

Reserve J ob Setting Procedure Start Scanning/Printing Present Output J ob L Press the START PRINT button to startscanning or printing the present outputjob.

2. The reserve job setting becomes available when the “RESERVE "folder key on the

Basic screen appears clear. Basic screen: reserve job unavailable Basic screen: reserve job available Cioe) Set Reserve J ob L Touch “RESERVE" folder key to display the Basic screen for the reserve setting. When the Basic screen forthe reserve setting is displayed, all keys on the LCD and operation panel will function for the reserve job setting. Basic screen

2. Setthe desired copying conditions for the reserve job.

Having Problems? When any trouble such as paper jam or paper out during the reserve job setting, the “SETTING” folder key on the Reserve Setting screen will change to “J AM” or “ADD PAPER" folder key. See p. 7-15 to p. 7-16 for troubleshooting.

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 2. Reserve Mode and J ob List (continued)

Scan Originals of Reserve J ob L Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the platen glass afterthe copier completes to scan original(s) ofthe presentoutputjob. The message ‘Ready to copy” will be displayed on the Basic screen.

reserve job. Advice: Reserve J ob of Sheet/Cover Insertion When Sheet/Cover Insertion is selected in reserve job setting, the following message may be displayed in the message area. Load the copy paper specified in the message after the present output job is completed. Please load size ** paper in any tray except tray # Advice: Reserve J ob and APS The following message may be displayed in the message area during the reserve job setting due to the APS being activated. Load the copy paper specified in the message after the present output job is completed. Please load size ** paper in any tray except tray #

3. When the originals of the reserve job are all scanned, the Basic screen of the

“SETTING” folder will be restored automatically, displaying the current condition of the present output job. Having Problems? When any trouble such as paper jam or paper out during the reserve job setting, the “SETTING" folder key on the Basic screen for the reserve setting will change to ‘J AM" or “ADD PAPER" folder key. See p. 6-36 for troubleshooting. Set Another Reserve J ob Repeat steps El and EI. Up to 4 reserve job are available to be set at a time. Start Next Reserve J ob When present output job is completed with any reserve job set, the Basic screen will display the copying conditions ofthe nextreserve job, and the outputofthe nextreserve job will start automatically. Advice You can still continue to set copying conditions or to scan for another reserve job when present output job is completed. T°] Fast

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 2. Reserve Mode and J ob List (continued)

Job List Screen Touch the ‘J OB LIST” key on the Basic screen to display the J ob Listscreen (see below). The J ob List screen allows you to perform the following functions. *_ confirm machine status +. change order of reserve job + delete reserve job To return the Basic screen, touch “OK” on the J ob List screen. Job List screen (003 COPIER Waiting (004 COPIER Waiting Ce À Joe Jpovance STATUS:

Displays the No. (001-999) for each job assigned to the machine. Displays the machine's current mode of operation. Seven modes are listed below. COPIER RESERVE COPIER PRINTER RESERVE PRINTER CONTROLLER TANDEM COPIER INTERRUPT Displays the current status of the machine for each job. [indication] [Meaning] READY : Ready to use in each mode WAITING : Warming up in each mode SCANNING : Scanning original(s) in copy mode ERROR : Error in each mode PRINTING : Printing in each mode NO PAPER : No paper in copy/print mode STOP : Stop in each mode NEXT PRINT : Waiting for the completion of the previous operation in copy/print mode INITIALIZING : Initializing for controller READY TO RESERVE : Ready to reserve RECEIVING : Receiving the data for controller

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 2. Reserve Mode and J ob List (continued)

TOTAL PAGE(s): Displays the number of scanned pages for each job. (0 to 999) PAGE(s) LEFT: Displays the remaining copy count of the job. 0 to 999 (The number exceeding 999 will be displayed as 999.) Copy count = No. of scanned pages x Print quantity MINUTE(s) TO GO: Displays the time (in minutes) required for completing the job. Exceeding 999 minutes: 999 T Shorter than 1 minute: >1 Other: The following message will be displayed on the second bar when the reserved job does not exist.

[RESERVED JOB DOES NOT EXIST |

To Change the Order of Reserve J ob

1. Touch the lower/upper arrow key to highlight the desired reserve job.

2. Touch “ADVANCE”. The highlighted reserve job is shifted to the output job below.

3. To return the Basic screen, touch “OK” on the J ob List screen.

To Delete the Reserve J ob

1. Touch the lower/upper arrow key to highlight the desired reserve job.

2. Touch “DELETE”. The highlighted reserve job is cleared.

3. To return the Basic screen, touch “OK” on the J ob List screen.

Troubleshooting in Reserve Setting Troubleshooting : “J AM” folder key When paper jam of the present output job occurs during the Reserve job setting, the “SETTING” folder key on the Basic screen will change to blinking J AM"folder key, and the ERROR indicator on the operation panel will light. Basic screen Operation panel CL CI

ET EL In this case, you can still continue the reserve job setting, and also scan the originals for the reserve job if mishandled paper has occurred to the printing job. Touch the ‘J AM” folder key to display the Paper J am Position screen. To view Help screen instructions touch “GUIDE” and remove paper/original. The ERROR indicator will go out. Press START PRINT button. The output job will be reprocessed. Touch the “SETTING” folder key to continue setting the reserve job. nPUNE T°]

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 2. Reserve Mode and J ob List (continued)

Troubleshooting : “ADD PAPER” folder key When the papertray is empty in the present output job during the Reserve job setting, the “SETTING” folder key on the Basic screen will change to blinking “ADD PAPER” folder key. Basic screen In this case, you can still continue the reserve job setting. L Touch the “ADD PAPER" folder key to display the Basic screen.

2. Confirm the empty tray and supply the paper.

3. Press the START PRINT button. The output job will be reprocessed.

4. Touch “SETTING” folder key to continue setting the reserve job.

Troubleshooting : Original misfed in Reserve J ob When misfed paper occurs to the reserve job originals, the related J am Position screen will be displayed. Jam Position screen L To view Help screen instructions, touch “GUIDE” and remove original.

2. Press START PRINT button to continue scanning original for the reserve job.

Image quality in the normal default mode is adequate for most copying needs. Special modes are available for jobs that require enhanced image quality, as for complex text or graphic images, or high quality photos, etc. High Mode High image quality sharpens the image more than the normal mode, butuses more memory than the normal default mode. Fewer originals can be copied at one time. Basic rules for High mode + Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively.

• Use platen glass and/or RADF. Advice If Memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre. Fast High Mode Specifications RADPF original paper weight: 60 to 90g/m° RADF capacity : 50 sheets max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode. Original size : A3,B4,F4/8.5"X13",A4R, A4,B5R, B5,A5R*, 8.5"x11"R Paper size for tray : A3,B4,F4/8.5"x13", A4R,A4,B5R,B5, A5R*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sheets max. Advice “ AS is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible None (The copying conditions may not function properly in some combination.) Procedure Set Copying Conditions L Touch “QUALITY” on the Basic screen to display the Quality Selection screen.

3. Touch “OK” to complete the setting and return to the Basic screen. The Quality

high icon will be displayed on the Basic screen. Quality Selection screen Basic screen iginal in the

4. Select other copying conditions, as required.

Section 7 : Other Basic Copying 3. Image Quality (continued)

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to setthe desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Basic screen Operation panel DATA ERROR 2] O © Le

0 CG Le) CHATS LS 2 C) J HR Place Original(s).. RADF: Original FACE UP Platen Glass: Original FACE DOWN Place the original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the Platen glass. Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8. Supplement 1: Using Store mode To use Store mode (using Platen glass or RADF), see p. 7-2 to p. 7-10 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies 1 Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details.

3. Image Quality (continued)

Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. Each original will be scanned and then copied. In some cases, originals loaded on the RADF are all scanned and discharged, then printing job starts in succession. Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. To stop printing, press the STOP/CLEAR button. This action also clears all the scanned data. After completion of copying, all the data in the memory is cleared. Press the AUTO RESET button to return to the initial condition. ERROR NC]

Section 7 : Other Basic Copying 3. Image Quality (continued)

Very High Mode Very high image quality is used for high quality photo output, and does not allow you to select any other copying condition which uses memory. Basic rules for Very high mode + Use platen glass only. Very High Mode Specifications Original size : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5SR*, 8.5"x11"R Paper size for tray : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5SR*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sheets max. Advice “ AS is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible Using RADF Sheet/Cover insertion E-sort Chapter Staple-sort Combination Sort Booklet 1»2 OHP interleave 2»2 Image insert 2»1 Dual page 122 using Platen glass Mixed original Store mode Repeat Reserve Auto layout Rotation Image shift Proof copy Procedure Set Copying Conditions L Touch “QUALITY” on the Basic screen to display the Quality Selection screen.

2. Touch “VERY HIGH”.

3. Touch “OK” to complete the setting and return to the Basic screen. The Quality

very high icon will be displayed on the Basic screen. Basic screen Quality Selection screen

4. Select other copying conditions, as required.

Section 7 : Other Basic Copying 3. Image Quality (continued)

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Basic screen Operation panel DATA ERROR [P]lo]fe] ET CE) Place Original(s) on the Platen Glass...FACE DOWN 1 Openthe RADF.

2. Place the original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8. Please Be Reminded! When the Non image area erase is selected, do notclose RADF. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. GE POWER SAVER OMIOFF Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. Press the AUTO RESET button to return to the initial condition. TE] Image Quality

4, CHECK Button Press the CHECK button to confirm copying selections before pressing the START PRINT button. In this mode, use P roof copy to produce a sample ofthe copied set before copying multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of some special copying conditions. Basic rules for Proof copy

• All originals are scanned into memory and output collectively. + _Basically for copying conditions using RADF. When using Store mode, however, scanning from the Platen glass is available. *_ Cannot be used for printing samples of Density shift setting. *_ For printing more than 1 set. *_ Can be operated repeatedly. Since each operation reduces the set print quantity, re- enter it as required. Proof Copy Specifications RADF original paper weight RADF capacity 60 to 90g/m° 50 sheets max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode Original size : A3,B4,F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5SR*, 8.5"x11"R Paper size for tray : A3,B4,F4/8.5"x13", A4R,A4,B5R,B5, ASR*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice “ AS is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible Group Reserve Image quality (Very high) Check Screen and How to Make a Proof Copy Procedure Set Copying Conditions L As required, set the copying conditions on the Basic screen or the Application Selection screen.

4. CHECK Button (continued)

Platen Glass: Original FACE DOWN 1 Place the original into RADF or onto the Platen glass. Advice For details of how to place the original, see p. 6-8.

2. Scan the originals, as required.

Display Check Screen Press the CHECK button on the operation panel to display the Check screen. Verify the settings made for the current job. For details of the Check mode items, see p. 7- 22 to p. 7-27. To change any settings before operating Proof copy, proceed to EX. To operate Proof copy, proceed to step 2. in El. To start printing immediately, proceed to El. Operation panel para En! &1[ Ea]I CII AUTORESET Check screen CHECK MODE Print Quantity . 15 Image quality .. Normal Copy Mode Copy Density Lens Mode . Paper Size Paper Type — Output Mode .…. NonSort TRAYI PROOF_ COPY Change Settings before Proof Copy

1. Touch “EXIT” to exit from the Check mode and return the Basic screen.

2. Change the copying conditions, as required.

3. Return to the Basic screen.

Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. To operate Proof copy, proceed to step 2. in El. To start printing immediately, proceed to El. TE] CHECK Button

Section 7 : Other Basic Copying 4. CHECK Button (continued)

Make a Proof Copy L Press the CHECK button on the Operation panel to display the Check screen.

2. Touch “PROOF COPY”.

A set of sample copy will be output. Check screen CHECK MODE Print Quantity . Image quality Copy Mode ...... Copy Density . Lens Hode … Paper Size . Paper Type . Output Mode EXIT Advice To stop printing the sample copy, press the STOP/CLEAR button. The Check screen will be restored. In this case, the scanned image data will not be cleared. Having Problems? When Groupis selected on the operation panel as the Outputmode, Proofcopy cannot be operated. Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. To start printing after verifying the sample copy, proceed to EI. To change any settings, proceed to FI. Change Settings after Proof Copy After P roof copy, the “#" mark will be displayed on the Check Screen. You may change the selection with “#” mark indicated on the left. Check screen Basic screen CHECK MODE * can ? ginal in the R XPrint Quantity . 15 Image quality .. Normal Terrine] XCopy Mode ...... 1-1 Copy Density ... AE D Lens Mode ..... ANS Paper Size Paper Type C)p()) XOutput Hode . Hlpli]

1. Touch “EXIT” from Check mode and return to the Basic screen.

2. Change the copying conditions, as required.

4. CHECK Button (continued)

If any condition to be modified cannot be changed, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Allthe stored data will be cleared. Press the AUTO/RESET button to return to the initial settings, then set the copying conditions again. Make a Proof Copy/Change Settings Repeat steps in EI and FI until you receive a result that you are satisfied with. El Verify/Change Print Quantity Proof copy can be operated repeatedly. Since each operation reduces the set print quantity, re-enter it as required. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. The copier will outputthe rest except the sample set. If print quantity has been changed, the re-entered number of copied sets will be output. To stop printing, press the STOP/CLEAR button. This action also clears all the scanned data. After completion of copying, all the data in the memory is cleared. Press the AUTO RESET button to return to the initial condition. ERROR Ce]

Section 7 : Other Basic Copying 4. CHECK Button (continued)

How to View the Check Screen When any screen other than the Help, J am Positioning, J am Processing, and J OB LIST screens is displayed, pressing the CHECK button on the operation panel will display the Check screen. This Check screen allows you to view all the settings currently made. Advice The Basic screen displays the copying conditions set on the Basic screen only, while Check screen displays all the settings including special conditions specified on the Application Selection screen. When all the setting items cannot be displayed within a screen, arrow keys to go to subsequent pages will be displayed at the lower left corner of the Check screen. Basic screen CHECK MODE Print Quantity . 15 Image quality .. Normal Copy Mode ...... 11 Copy Density Lens Mode . Paper Size Paper Type Output Mode .…. NonSort TRAYI

E_1 PROOF COPY Ÿ EXIT

Basic copying functions (The following eightitems will be displayed whether selected or not.) Print quantity: Image quality: Copy mode: Copy density: Lens mode: Paper size: Paper type: Output mode: [UT Displays the number of copies currently set. Displays the currently set copy image quality. Displays the currently set copy mode. The screen displays “RADF" if RADF is ON. The set density will be enclosed in a rectangle if the density is set manually. IfAE is ON, the rectangle disappears and "AE "is displayed. Displays the magnification currently set. When AMS is ON, the system displays the magnification to be automatically selected. “AMS"is displayed until the magnification ratio is selected by AMS function. The system displays the paper size selected. If APS is ON, “APS"is displayed. If a name by paper type is given to the tray containing the selected paper size, that name is displayed. In the copier with Finisher, ifthe Sort, Group, Staple-sort, Non-sort, orFace Up Tray 1 function is ON, the system displays that function. In the copier without Finisher, ifthe E-sort, Sort, Group, or Face Up function is ON, the system displays that function.

Section 7 : Other Basic Copying 4. CHECK Button (continued)

Special copying functions (Display the items and selections specified on Application Selection screen.) Sheet/Cover insertion: Chapter: Combination: Booklet: OHP interleave: Image insert: Dual page: Mixed original: Text/P hoto enhance: Reverse image: Repeat image: Frame/Fold erasure: Auto layout: Thin/Thick paper: Image shift: Non image area erase: Store mode: The system displays “F” for the cover, the number of sheets to be inserted, and “B” for the back cover. The “F”, number of sheets to be inserted and “B”are displayed in normal characters in the case of copying. When blank sheets are inserted, the display will be in inverse video. The system displays pages specified as a title page. The system displays either “2 in 1”, “4 in 1”, of “8 in 1”, and also “portrait” or “landscape”. The system displays “ON”. The system displays either “Blank Interleaving“ or “Copy Interleaving”. The system displays pages inserted. The system displays either “Output L to R"or “Output R to L”. The system displays “ON”. The system displays either ‘Text”, “Photo”, or “Increase contrast”. The system displays “ON”. The system displays either a width to repeat manual or automatic setting. The system displays either or both, the amount of frame to be deleted or the amount of fold to be deleted. The system displays “ON”. The system displays ‘Thin Paper” or ‘Thick Paper”. The system displays the amountof an image to be shifted orreduced. The system displays “ON”. The system displays “ON”. TP] CHECK Button

The Help screen is a generic name for the screens that give you information on how to copy, how to supply toner or paper, or how to operate the operation panel and the keys on the LCD screen. Two types of Help screens are available, according to how they are selected. @ Press the HELP button on the operation panel while the Basic screen is displayed. The Help Basic screen will appear. @ Press the HELP button on the operation panel while specifying a desired copy condition on any screen other than the Basic screen. The screen instructing the corresponding setting procedure will be displayed. Advice When the Help screenis displayed, a question mark “?"is displayed on the upper right of the screen. While the Help screen is displayed, the CHECK, APPLICATION, JOB MEMORY and OUTPUT buttons on the operation panel are disabled. Help Basic Screen How to Display the Help Basic Screen 1 Display the Basic screen.

2. Press the HELP button on the operation panel. The Help Basic screen will appear.

To return to the Basic screen, press the “EXIT” on the Help screen, or press again the HELP button on the operation panel. Basic screen Operation panel para TOE MENT. AUTO RESET Help Basic screen

5. HELP Button (continued)

“STAPLE” key Touching this key displays the Staple Help Menu screen. Then, the Help screens for how to supply a staple cartridge wil “RADF” key To display the screen for setting the original for RADF. “ASSISTANCE” indicator The system displays the extension number of the key operator, see p.11-31. “?" icon À question mark is displayed when the Help screen is displayed. be displayed. Weekly Timer key To confim various setting conditions of Weekly Timer. “BYPASS” key To display how to supply paper to the Sheet bypass tray. HELP MODE | —— “TONER” key To display the Help screen for how to supply toner. “EXIT” key To release the Help screen. “HELP MENU” key To display the Help Menu. Service Cntre key To display the telephone and fax numbers ofthe Service Centre to be contacted upon occurrence of troubles or for inquiry or periodic maintenance. “TRAY” key Touching à “TRAY"key displays how to supply copy paper. The “STAPLE" key is displayed ifthe optional FS-105 Finisher is installed. How to operate the Help Basic screen Touching “HELP MENU"on the Help Basic screen displays the Help Menu screen. Touching “L. Hard keys” on the Help Menu screen displays Help screens that explain the functions of the buttons on the operation panel. Touching ‘2. Screen keys” on the Help Menu screen displays a Help screen that explains the meaning ofthe status ofthe keys when they are highlighted or displayed dark or in black. Touching “3. RADF Platen glass” on the Help Menu screen displays Help screens that explain the types of originals that cannot be fed using RADF and the daily cleaning and care of the RADF mechanism and the platen glass. Touching “4. Applications” on the Help Menu screen displays Help screens that explain seventeen functions of advanced copying on the Application Selection screen (see p. 8-2). Touching “5. J ob memory” displays a Help screen for job memory. Advice Ifthe Forward key (4) is displayed on the Help screen after touching any one ofthese five keys on the Help Menu screen, touch the key to go to the next screen. To return to the previous screen, touch the Reverse key (#). Touch the “HELP MENU” to return to the Help Menu screen. Touch the “EXIT” to return to the Basic screen. TP] HELP Button

Section 7 : Other Basic Copying 5. HELP Button (continued)

Help Screens for the Output Modes Procedure L Press the OUTPUT button on the operation panel to display the Output Mode screen.

2. Press the HELP button.

Help Screens for the J ob Memory Procedure + _ When the J ob No. Selection screen (p. 7-33 and p. 7-35) is displayed: Press the] OB MEMORY button on the operation panel to display the ] ob No. Selection screen, then press the HELP button. The screen explaining Store/Recall of the job memory will appear. + _ When the J ob Check screen (p. 7-33 and p. 7-35) is displayed: Pressing the HELP button displays the Help screen for the J ob Check screen. + _ When the Name Input screen (p. 7-33) is displayed: Pressing the HELP button displays the corresponding Help screen. Help Screen for the Paper Jam Position Screen Procedure When the P aper J am Position screen is displayed upon paper jamming, press the HELP button. The Help screen for the Paper J am Position screen will be displayed. Help Screens for Manual Setting on the Basic Screen Procedure *_ Display the Copy Mode screen (p. 6-12, p. 6-15, p. 6-18, p. 6-21), then press the HELP button. À Help screen for the Copy Mode screen will be displayed. *_ Display the Density Adjustment screen (p. 6-25), then press the HELP button. À Help screen for the Density Adjustment screen will be displayed. *_ Display the Lens Mode screen (p. 6-28), Zoom screen (p. 6-29) or Vert./Horiz. Zoom Screen (p. 6-31), then press the HELP button. A Help screen for selecting magnification will be displayed. *_ Displaythe Tray Selection screen (p. 6-33), then press the HELP button. A Help screen for the Tray Selection screen will be displayed. Help Screens for the Application Selection Screen When the Application Selection screen is displayed, press the HELP button to access information about Applications on the Help screen. The Help screen type varies according to the following conditions: @ No key on the Application Selection screen is touched. @) Any special copying function key is touched on the Application Selection screen. (@) Any special copying function has not been changed after copying. Press the Forward key (4) to go to the next screen. Pressing the Reverse key (#) returns to the previous screen. Pressing the “EXIT” key returns the system to the Basic screen. When No Key on the Application Selection Screen Is Touched: The six Help screens that also appear when “4! Applications” is selected on the Help Menu screen will be displayed.

Section 7 : Other Basic Copying 5. HELP Button (continued)

When Any Special Copying Function Key Is Touched on the Application Selection Screen: The Help screen for the advanced function that has been selected immediately before pressing the HELP button will be displayed. Advice For example, specify “Photo/Text Enhance”, then specify “Frame/Fold erasure” and press the HELP button. The Help screen for the Frame/Fold Erasure screen will be displayed. To view both Help screens, specify “Photo/TextEnhance mode”, then press the HELP button to display the Help screen for Photo/Text enhance mode. Then, exit the Help screen and specify “Frame/Fold erasure,” then press the HELP button to display the Help screen for Frame/Fold erasure. Forexample, when “Photo/Textenhance” and “Frame/Fold erasure”"are specified and then “Frame/Fold erasure” is cancelled, pressing the HELP button displays the Help screen for Photo mode.

• Press the HELP button when the Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen is displayed, or after returning to the Application Selection screen after setting. The Help screen for Sheet insertion mode will be displayed. + _ Display the Sheet/Cover Insertion Setting screen for the Sheet insertion mode, then press the HELP button. The Help screen for page setting will be displayed. *_Pressthe HELP button when the Chapter Insertion Setting screenis displayed, or after returning to the Application selection screen after setting. The Help screen for Chapter mode will be displayed. *_ Press the HELP button when the Combination Mode Selection screen is displayed, or after returning to the Application Selection screen after setting. The Help screen for Combination mode will be displayed. *_ Touch “Booklet” in the Application Selection screen to reverse the characters, then press the HELP button. The Help screens for copying from booklet will be displayed. *_ Pressthe HELP button when the OHP Interleave screenis displayed, or after returning to the Application Selection screen after setting. The Help screen for Blank Sheet Interleaving/Copy Sheet Interleaving will be displayed.

• Press the HELP button when the Image Insertion Setting screen is displayed, or after returning to the Application Selection screen after setting. The Help screen for Image insert mode will be displayed.

• Press the HELP button when the Dual Page Mode Selection screen is displayed or after returning to the Application Selection screen after setting. The Help screen for Dual Page mode will be displayed. *_ Touch “Mixed Original” in the Application Selection screen to reverse the characters, then press the HELP button. The Help screens for copying from mixed original will be displayed. + Press the HELP button when the Text/Photo Enhance screen is displayed or after returning to the Application Selection screen after setting. The Help screen for Text/ Photo Enhance mode will be displayed. *_ Touch “Reverse image” in the Application Selection screen to reverse the characters, then press HELP button. The Help screens for copying in reverse image mode will be displayed.

• Press the HELP button when the Repeat Mode Selection screen is displayed, or after returning to the Application Selection screen after setting. The Help screen for copying in Repeat mode will be displayed. + Press the HELP button when the Frame/Fold erasure screen is displayed or after returning to the Application selection screen after setting. The Help screen for copying with Frame/F old erasure will be displayed. *_ Touch “AUTO layout” in the Application Selection screen to reverse the characters, en press HELP button. The Help screens for copying in Auto layout mode will be isplayed. TE] HELP Button

Section 7 : Other Basic Copying 5. HELP Button (continued)

+*_Pressthe HELP button whenthe Thin/ThickP aper screenis displayed, or after returning to the Application Selection screen after setting. The Help screen for copying thin/thick paper will be displayed.

• Press the HELP button when the Image Shift Selection screen is displayed or after returning to the Application Selection screen after setting. The Help screen for copying with Image shift will be displayed.

• Touch “Non image area erase” in the Application Selection screen to reverse the characters, then press the HELP button. The Help screens for copying in Non image area erase mode will be displayed. *_ Touch “Store Mode” on the Application Selection screen to highlightit, then press the HELP button. The Help screens for copying in Store mode will be displayed. When Pressing the HELP Button without Changing Applications after Copying: The Help screen that informs how to cancel the application functions will be displayed. [T°

Frequently used copying settings can be stored, and simply recalled, when necessary, without making complicated setting operation. Up to 15 copy patterns (= jobs) can be stored. The stored jobs can be identified by giving names consisting of letters and/or numbers. Copying patterns that can be registered Copying conditions which can be set on the Basic screen Copying conditions which can be set on the Application Selection screen. Copying conditions which can be set on the Output mode. Number of copies

Job No. Selection screen para 1 [ABC COMPANY A HELP Button

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 6. JOB MEMORY Button (continued)

Procedure L Setthe copying conditions that is to be stored in the memory.

2. Display the Basic screen.

3. Press the JOB MEMORY button on the operation panel. The J ob No. Selection

screen will be displayed. Advice - To Display Help Screen Pressing the HELP button on the operation panel right after the above operation will display the J ob Memory Instruction screen. Touch “EXIT” to return to the Job No. Selection screen. Advice - To Discontinue J ob Store Operation When you wish to discontinue the following operation, press the AUTO RESET button on the operation panel. Irrespective of the screen displayed, the J ob store operation will be discontinued, and the Basic screen will be restored.

4. Touch “ENTRY” on the J ob No. Selection screen.

5. The J ob Store Check screen will be displayed. The copying conditions set in step

1 will be displayed. Confirm the selections. Advice - Corrective Setting of Copying Conditions If the stored contents include any mistake, touch “CANCEL” on the J ob Store Check screen. The Basic screen will be restored. Newly set the correct copying conditions, and re-do from step 3.

6. Touch “OK”key on the ] ob Store Check screen. The J ob No. Selection screen will

be displayed, to show “L”to “5” of J ob No. keys. Ifthe À Upper arrow and Y Lower arrow keys can be used to scroll through the 15 job numbers.

7. Touch the desired J ob No. key. The selected J ob No. key will be highlighted, and

the Name Input screen will be displayed. Atthe Job No. key with LOCK mark “ 8 ” off and without any name, nothing is stored, and you can store your conditions. Atthe J ob No. key with LOCK mark “ g "off but with a name, copying conditions are stored, but you can store your new conditions, which will replace those already stored. Atthe J ob No. key with LOCK mark “a "lit, the copying conditions are locked and you cannot store your new conditions. Advice - Lock of J ob No. Key To lock orunlock the copying conditions stored at a J ob No. key, or to delete the locked copying conditions, see p. 11-28 in “Section 11: KEY OPERATOR MODE”. Advice - Discontinuing Storing at a Job No. Key When you wish to discontinue your storing atthe touchedJ ob No. key, touch "CANCEL”. The Basic screen will be restored while the copying conditions set in step 1 remain set. If you press the AUTO RESET button on the operation panel, the setcopying conditions will also be cleared.

8. Enter a job name in up to 24 characters, using the touch screen alphabet keypad.

If required, scroll with the # Upper arrow and # Lower arrow key to use lower case and symbol keys. To correct an entry, touch “DEL.” repeatedly to delete each character entered, then enter the correct job name. If you do not wish to enter a name, touch “OK”. The key displays [***** ] in place of a name.

9. Touch “OK” key on the Name Input screen. The J ob No. Selection screen will be

displayed. To re-enter the J ob name, touch “CANCEL” to return to the Name Input screen.

10. Touch “OK on the J ob No. Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

6. JOB MEMORY Button (continued)

ARRET ob Check] ENTRY Ï CANCEL Ï Job No. Selection screen Job Check screen Job No. Selection screen Brint Guantit ABC COMPANY Image quality + 2 Jun HONICA CO. ABC COMPANY MAIL. HONICA CO. Procedure 1 Display the Basic screen.

2. Press the JOB MEMORY button on the operation panel. The Job No.

Selection screen will be displayed. Advice - To Display Help Screen Pressing the HELP button on the operation panel right after the above operation will display the ] ob Memory Instruction screen. Touch “EXIT” key to return to the J ob No. Selection screen. , Touch the J ob No. key for the job to be recalled. “l'’to “5” of] ob No. keys are displayed. Ifthe À Upper arrow and Y Lower arrow keys can be used to scroll through the 15 job numbers. Advice - Discontinuing recalling To discontinue the recalling operation, touch “CANCEL"” key. The Basic screen will be restored. Select one of the named job keys. The selected button will be reversed. If ‘Job Check”is touched in this case, the copy conditions written at the selected key will be displayed on the J ob Check screen, to allow confirmation. Touch “OK” on the J ob Check screen. The stored copying conditions will be set, and the Basic screen will be restored. Te] JOBMEMORY Buton

Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job. When interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the preceding job are restored and the Basic screen displays by pressing the INTERRUPT button again. Press the INTERRUPT button when the copier is in the following conditions: *_ Printing continuously the image stored in the memory *_ Scanning the originals into memory + Scanning the originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode Please Be Reminded! InReserve mode, pressing the INTERRUPT button before the copier finishes scanning originals of the Reserve job will clear the setting selected for Reserve job right after the copier gets ready for the Interrupt mode. See p. 7-11 to p. 7-16 for details of the Reserve mode. The copier cannot scan multiple originals for collective printing in Interrupt mode. Interrupt Mode Specifications Interrupt mode will not be available under the following conditions: + Scanning or printing job is not performed.

• Image quality (Very High) *_ The copier is in trouble such as service call or paper jam. *__ Another Interrupt job Copy paper : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*, 8.5"x1l"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 1 sheet Advice “ AS is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible Reserve Auto low power/Auto shut off does not function during Interrupt mode. [UT

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 7. INTERRUPT Button (continued)

Procedure Press INTERRUPT Button L TheLED oftheINTERRUPT button willbeilluminated. [nn e]

2. For particular jobs in progress, copying will cease only | © COHEN

after certain phases of the immediate operation are completed, as indicated by LED conditions described [] [3] low. + Collectively printing image stored in memory I] [s] TheINTERRUPT LED blinks untilone setofthe current EEE job is printed. Then the LED remains steady for the [Lo] © temporary job performed in Interrupt mode. Scanning originals into memory ee Lr TheINTERRUPT LED blinks until scanning is completed for all originals placed in the document feeder. Then, the LED remains steady forthe temporary job performed in Interrupt mode. Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode The INTERRUPT LED blinks untilthe copier completes the current printing job, scans all originals placed on the document feeder, and prints one setofthe Reserved job. The LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode. Having Problems? INTERRUPT Pressing the INTERRUPT button does notfunction unless the Basic screen is displayed on the LCD. The Interrupt mode is also unavailable under the conditions mentioned in the specifications.

3. The “SETTING” folder key on the Basic screen will change to “INTERRUPT”.

Basic screen Basic screen in Interrupt mode

LICHTER] Set Copying Conditions L The copying settings in Interrupt mode are as follows.

Copy Mode RADF : ON AE : ON Lens Mode : 1:1 APS : ON Print Quantity : 1 E-SORT : OFF Finisher : OFF

2. Selectothercopying features thatare compatible with the Interruptmode, if desired.

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 7. INTERRUPT Button (continued)

Start Copying L Press the START PRINT button. The Interruptcopying job will start. URI LL Press INTERRUPT Button Again L When Interrupt copying is completed, press the | enson INTE R RU PT pute Le gare INTERRU PT LED wi (eo) ES e turned out and the older key on the Basic screen will return to SETTING. d !] B] CA

2. The copier returns to the settings of the initial job. ] [6]

SOPTCUERR OS EA CERN STARTPRNT w{_ \r Resume Copying Replace the initial original, then press the START PRINT button to resume copying. [UT

8. Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray

This is used to copy onto the paper of the size that is not loaded in the trays, or onto the special paper such as thick paper, thin paper, OHP transparent films, etc. that cannot be loaded into the trays. Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Specifications Copy paper sizes : A3, B4, A4R, F4/8.5"x13", A4, B5, B5R, A5R*, 8.5"x11" Paper weight : Plain paper; 60 to 90g/m? Thick paper; 91 to 130g/m° Thin paper; 50 to 59g/m? Special paper; OHP transparent film, label paper, reproducible paper Capacity : 100 sheets max. - Plain paper 1 sheet each - OHP transparentfilm, thin paper, thick paper, label paper reproducible paper Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible with Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray None Procedure INTERRUPT Set Copying Conditions Buton As required, set the copying conditions. Brest Place Copy Paper L Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray.

2. For loading A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", or A4R size paper,

open the guide bar. ==

3. Place the copy paper onto the Multi-sheet bypass tray,

and adjust the paper guides to the paper. Advice + Straighten any paper curl by hand before inserting the copy paper. + Load an OHP transparent film with the smooth/glossy side UP. T°]

Section 7 : Other Basic Functions 8. Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray (continued)

Place Original(s).. RADF: Original FACE UP Platen Glass: Original FACE DOWN place original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. Advice For details of how to place the original, see p. 6-8. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. After copying is completed, close the Sheet bypass tray. | © RS

DL) LO Advice The Face up mode will be selected automatically when Multi-sheet bypass tray is used under the following conditions: + Output onto the Finisher upper tray in the machine with Finisher + Output onto the exit tray in the machine without Finisher If you desire to release this automatic selection of Face up mode, contact your Service Centre.

This copier allows various application functions to be selected on the Application Selection screen, in addition to the basic copy operation. This section describes how to use the respective application functions selected on the Application Selection screen.

1. Application Selection Screen

While the Basic screen is displayed, press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel. The Application Selection screen will be displayed. Basic screen DE Fe . Application Selection screen PC el Éypa ec cation Function Mai = EE ” sen nec ffoenerjuoce jose 57e Operation panel Thip/hick CANCEL AUTO RESET + When an application function that requires Store mode is selected, the “Store Mode” key will be highlighted automatically.

• To clear all application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. + Touching “OK” key completes the setting, and the Basic screen will be restored.

• To restore the original copying conditions, touch “CANCEL” key.

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 1. Application Selection Screen (continued)

+ When the Basic screen is restored with an application function selected, the green lamp ofthe APPLICATION button lights to show thatan application function has been selected. To check the copying conditions currently selected, press the CHECK button on the Operation panel to display the Check screen. (See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27.) Operation panel Check screen Print Quantity .…. 15 Image Quality .… Normal Copy Mode... 1-1 RADF Copy Density ... AE Lens Mode Paper Size Paper Type Output Mode … PROOF_ COPY AUTO RESET Advice: APPLICATION icon This copier is initially set to display the icon “&PPLICATION in the lower message area ofthe screen, when the display returns to the Basic screen after setting any application function on the Application Selection screen. Please contact your Service Centre, if you do not want to activate the icon. Basic screen Advice - Help Screens for Application Functions + When the Application Selection screen is displayed with none ofthe keys reversed, press the HELP button on the Operation panel. The screen briefly describing application functions will be displayed. *_Ifthe HELP button on the Operation panel is pressed with the Application Selection screen displayed after any one of the keys has been touched and reversed, the screen describing the function of the touched key will be displayed. + After completion ofthe copying using an application function, press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application Selection screen, then press the HELP button. The screen describing how to cancel the application function will be displayed. Touch “EXIT” key to restore the Application Selection screen.

application Selection Screen

2. Sheet/Cover Insertion

With this mode covers may be added to copied sets and insertsheets can be added into the setto indicate where different sections commence. Both the covers and inserts can be blank or copied sheets. The Sheet/Cover insertion copying can be classified into the following modes: @ Front cover mode Front copy: Copies and inserts a sheet from Tray 1* or Multi-sheet bypass tray into the finished set, as a front cover. Front blank: Inserts a non copied sheet from Tray 1* or Multi-sheet bypass tray into the : finished set, as a front cover. @) Back cover mode Back copy: Copies and inserts a sheet from Tray 1* or Multi-sheet bypass tray into the finished set, as a back cover. Back blank: Inserts a non copied sheet from Tray 1* or Multi-sheet bypass tray into the : finished set, as a back cover. (3) Insertion mode Copy insertion: Copies and inserts sheets from Tray 1*. Blank insertion: Inserts non copied sheets from Tray 1*. Advice

• Sheet insertion from Tray 2, 3, or 4 can be selected by the key operator. See p. 11- 45 to p. 11-48. Thick paper can be used for front and back covers. Various sheet insertion copying can be made in a combination of three modes. (® Frontcover mode (Front copy) @ Front covermode (Frontblank) San — ETS Smess | LnÙ 1 Originals Originals ® Back cover mode (Back copy) @ Back cover mode (Back blank) See 7) SuvEroRs uevors 11

Basic rules for Sheet/Cover Insertion copying + Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively. Advice In case memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre.

• Use the Store mode in the following operation. When the number of originals are more than 50, perform the RADF store mode. When copying the originals that cannot be fed through the RADF, perform the Platen store mode. *_ When using Multi-sheet bypass tray for covers, load copy paper of the same size as insertions loaded in Tray 1. To insert thick paper as covers, be sure to use Multi-sheet bypass tray. *_ The copier detects the sizes oforiginals and ofthe paper loaded in Tray 1 to automatically select the optimum magnification. (Automatic magnification selection) Advice The tray selected for insertion paper in the Sheet/cover insertion is also used for copy insertion in the Chapter. Sheet/Cover Insertion Specifications RADF to be used (Select Platen store mode when using platen glass). Maximum insert sheets 15 locations, including front and back covers Pages available to be set : p. 1 to p. 999 RADF capacity : 50 sheets max. (1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode) Original size : A3,B4,A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"x11" (50 to 130g/m°) Copy paper size : A3,B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, ASR*, 8.5"x11"R (80g/m? paper recommended) Cover/insertion size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5SR, B5, A5R Insertion paper : Plain paper, coloured paper (60 to 90g/m?) Cover paper : 60 to 130g/m°? paper Number of copies per original : 999 max. Tray for cover? : Tray 1 or Multi-sheet bypass tray Tray for insertion? : Traÿ 1 Tray for copy paper? Traÿ 2,3,4 AMS function is automatically set. Advice #: Load A5 paper in lengthwise feed (17) only. See p. 6-4. *: Trays for cover, insertion, and copy paper can be freely selected in Key operator mode. See p. 11-45 to p. 11-48. Incompatible If any of the following copying conditions are going to be set, the Sheet/Cover insertion may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing selection. APS Image insert Group mode Dual page Image quality (Very high) Mixed original Chapter Repeat Combination Auto layout Booklet Non image area erase OHP interleave SheetiCover Insertion

Procedure Set Insertions on Tray 1 Place the plain or coloured paper to be used for Insertions into Tray 1 (universal tray). Advice AMS function is automatically set. If copy paper of the same size as that of originals is set on Tray 1, full-size copying is effected. Ifcopy paper different in size from originals is set on Tray 1, an optimum magnification is selected. Set Covers on Tray 1 or Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Place the plain or coloured paper that is to be used for Covers (front and back) into Tray 1 (universal tray) or into the Multi-sheet bypass tray. When inserting thick paper as Covers, use the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Load paper of the same size as that of the Insertions.

Multi-sheet bypass tray: Covers = LA | Es —— Tray 1: Insertions S Le or covers T J

D © Check Copy Paper: Trays 2, 3 and 4 Checkthatone ofthe trays (either Tray 2, 3, or 4)is also loaded with the same size paper as the Cover or Insertions which have been placed in Tray 1 (universal tray). Advice Ifpaper equal in size to thatloaded into Tray Lis also loaded into othertrays, the copier will automatically choose the paper tray with the smallest number located on the front of the tray. E Set Copying Conditions Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode. z Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panelto display the Application Selection screen.

3. Touch “Sheet/Cover Insertion” key on the Application Selection screen to display the

Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen. Touch the keys on the Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen.

Application Selection screen Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen CS LT

REPORT. Originals Copies Originals Copies cover, do not reverse these keys. (2) Touch ‘TRAY1" or “BYPASS” key to select the tray from which the front/back cover is fed. (3) To use thick paper for the front cover, touch and reverse ‘THICK PAPER” key. “BYPASS” key is automatically selected. If Back Cover Mode is also selected in the same job, the back cover will be thick as well. Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL” key. The Application Selection screen will be restored. (4) To select Back Cover mode, see p. 8-8. (5) To select Insertion mode, see p. 8-9 to p. 8-10. (6) Touch “OK” key on the Sheet/C over Insertion Mode Selection screen to return to the Application Selection screen. Proceed to step 5 on p. 8-10. SheetiCover Insertion Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen Sheet/Cover insertion Mode Selection screen (FRONT COPY) (FRONT BLANK) ques IBACK Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen Sheet/Coverinsertion Mode Selection screen (No selection) (Thick paper) TRAŸI

Back Coveh Mode (Back'sacx aPRack'Blauk)BLANK” key. When not placing a back @ Back cover mode (Back copy) @) Back cover mode (Back blank) my | l E] DEN ll y} suREYORS 1 ji 1/] Hiil ! SURVEYORS | F ji 1l ll Ro ET Ro ETS Originals Copies Originals Copies cover, do not reverse these keys. (2) To use thick paper for the back cover, touch and reverse ‘THICK PAPER" key. “BYPASS” key is automatically selected. If Front Cover Mode is selected atthe same time, the front cover will be thick as well. Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL"” key. The Application Selection screen will be restored. (3) To select Front Cover mode, see p. 8-7. (4) To select Insertion mode, see p. 8-9 to p. 8-10. (5) Touch “OK” key on the Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen to return to the Application Selection screen. Proceed to step 5 on p. 8-10. Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen Sheet/CoverInsertion Mode Selection screen (BACK COPY) (BACK BLANK) Sheet/Coverinsertion Mode Selection screen Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen (No selection) (Thick paper) IE: CANEL [ K |

(3) To select Back Cover Mode, see p. 8-8. (4) Touch “OK” key on the Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen to display the Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen (BLANK INSERTION) Sheet/Cover Insertion Mode Selection screen (COPY INSERTION)

Sheet/Cover Insertion Setting screen. Enterthe page number ofeach insertion location, using the Ten keys ofthe Operation panel. The specified page number is displayed on the screen. Touch “SET” key to fix the entered page number, or touch “DELETE” key to clear. Repeat step (5) until all the page numbers to be inserted are entered. Advice: Copy Insertion Operation panel Sheet/Cover Insertion Setting screen DATA ERROR 0 GPL : DOS CDELETE 7 1 [] Ce] Col. m A Cone | © |

• In1B1 mode, for example, if “11” is entered, the 11th page ofthe 1-sided originals is copied on the paper in Tray 1 and inserted. + In12 mode, for example, if“11"is entered, the 11th page ofthe originals is copied on the front side and the 12th page on the back side of the paper in Tray 1 and inserted. Entering “12” will result in the same.

• In 22 mode, for example, if “11” is entered, both sides of the 11th page of the originals are copied on both sides of the paper in Tray 1 and inserted.

• In21 mode, for example, if “11” is entered, only the front page of the 11th page is copied on the paper in Tray 1 and inserted. Advice: Blank Insertion

• n11 mode, for example, if “11” is entered, the blank paper in Tray 1 is inserted after the 11th page of the 1-sided originals is copied.

• In12 mode, for example, if “11” is entered, the blank paper in Tray 1 is inserted after the 11th page of the originals is copied on the front side and the 12th page on the back side of the paper. Entering “12” will result in the same. + In22 mode, for example, if “11” is entered, the blank paper in Tray 1 is inserted after both sides of the 11th page of the originals are copied on both sides of the paper.

• In2B1 mode, for example, if “11” is entered, the blank paper in Tray 1 is inserted after the page 11 of the 2-sided originals is copied. Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL” key. The Application Selection screen will be restored. Touch “OK” key on the Sheet/Cover Selection screen to return to the Application Selection screen. Proceed to step 5. The Application Selection screen will be restored. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When copying more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode or Platen store mode. Touch “Store Mode” key to highlight it. Advice To clear all application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR" key. Touch “OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored. Enter Print Quantity le”

Enter the desired number of copied set, using the Ten keys on the Operation panel. The entered number will be displayed in the upper right message area of the screen. To change the print quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enterthe correctnumber. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Place Originals...FACE UP Operation panel Basic screen

[e] 4 l17 CERN. SA 1 Putoriginals in order of pagination, and place originals FACE UP in the RADF. 50 sheets max. can be loaded.

2. Align the front original guide to the

originals. Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8. Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF store mode: To copy a setof more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-8 to p. 7-10 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Platen store mode: To copy originals that cannot be fed through the RADF onto both sides of copy paper, use Platen store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-4 to p. 7-7 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen. When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on RADF are allscanned and discharged, then outputjob starts in succession. MER When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to start the output job. 2] (3] To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned data 5] [6] in the memory will be cleared. After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. p] [ce] a

B][9] den OS | Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. Having Problems? If paper of the same size as that loaded in Tray 1 is not loaded in other trays, the message "Please load A4 paper in Tray 2, 3, or 4" will be displayed. (The paper size displayed is the size which is loaded in Tray 1.) Load paper of the same size as that loaded in Tray 1 in any other tray, then press the START PRINT button. JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher Copies In te COpy run exceeus tray whilst the copier is still ci jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the followi Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R)

JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case ofthe copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. + To release Sheet/Cover insertion mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch the reversed “Sheet/Cover insertion” key, then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. + _ Torestore theinitial copying conditions, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel.

Chapter copying is used with the RADPF in 1 2 or 2 2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages on the right side, rather than reverse side of a duplex copy. 1-sided originals Copies in Chapter mode 2-sided originals Title page Title pages

Title pages Title \ Basic rules for Chapter copying + Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively. Advice If memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre. *_ Use the Store mode in the following conditions. When the number of originals are more than 50, perform the RADF store mode. When copying the originals that cannot be fed through the RADF, perform the Platen store mode.

• Only 12 or2B2 mode is compatible.

• Max. 15 title pages can be set from p. 1 to p. 999. Chapter Copying Specifications RADF to be used. (When copying from the platen glass, select Store mode.) Title pages :15 max. Page range :p. 1 to p. 999 pages RADF capacity : 50 max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode Original paper size : A3, B4, AGR, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"x11" Tray paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*, 8.5"x11"R (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice

• Load A5 size paper in lengthwise feed ([]) only. je"

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 3. Chapter (continued)

Incompatible If any ofthe following copying conditions are going to be set, the Chapter copying may be cancelled orthe key concerned on the screen may become faint, notallowing setting. 1»1 Image insert 2»1 Dual page Image quality (Very high) Repeat Sheet/Cover insertion Auto layout Combination Thin/Thick paper OHP interleave Non image area erase Procedure Place Original(s)...FACE DOWN 1 Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode.

2. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application

3. Touch “Chapter” key. The Chapter Insertion Setting screen will be displayed.

Chapter Insertion Setting screen [E Mc Application Selection screen Select Application Funct ior EVE BITES INSERTION D TO — | Chapter

4. Enter the page number of the title page.

(1) Use the Ten key on the Operation panel to enterthe page number ofthe title page. The entered page number will be displayed on the screen. Touch “SET” key to fix the entry, or "DELETE” key to clear the entry. (2) Repeat this for each title page number you want to appear on the right side. You can set up to 15 entries within p. 1 to p. 999. Having Problems? To clear an incorrect entry, touch “DELETE” key on the screen or the CLEAR QTY. button on the Operation panel, touch "SET"key and re-enterthe correct page number. Advice + When the page number specified is larger than the total original page count, the entry will be invalid. + Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are entered from the smaller page number. + You cannot enter the same page number twice. Advice To return to the original condition set before change, touch “CANCEL” key. (3) Touch “Booklet” key on the Chapter Insertion Setting screen to use this function. To change the selection of paper tray for copying title page, touch “Copy Insertion” key on the screen. 8-15 | (4) When all entries are made, touch “OK” key.

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 3. Chapter (continued)

5. The Application Selection screen will be restored.

6. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When copying more than 50 originals,

use RADF store mode or Platen store mode. Touch “Store Mode” key to highlight it. Advice To clear all application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

7. Touch ‘OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to enter the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR [1] : al in the QelB]) ©

Place Originals...FACE UP 1 Putoriginals in order of pagination, and place originals FACE UP inthe RADF. 50 sheets max. can be loaded.

2. Align the front original guide to the

originals. Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8. Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF store mode: To copy a setof more than 50 originals, use RADPF store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-8 to p. 7-10 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page.

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 3. Chapter (continued)

Platen store mode: To copy originals that cannot be fed through the RADF onto both sides of copy paper, use Platen store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-4 to p. 7-7 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies L Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on RADF FO a are all scanned and discharged, then output job starts in succession. 2][3] When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to 5| [6] start the output job. . BIL9] To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned data in the memory will be cleared. p| [e] A Eq. SA [nr After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. Chapter ZA CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following. Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R)

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 3. Chapter (continued)

JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case of the copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function.

• To release Chapter insertion mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch “Chapter” key and then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. *_ Torestore the initial copying conditions, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel.

Used to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper. Original 4in 1 copying 2 in 1 copying 8 in 1 copying Konica 1 2 ; ? 5161718

Basic rules for Combination + Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively. Advice If memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre.

• Use the Store mode in the following conditions. When the number of originals are more than 50, use the RADF store mode. When copying the originals that cannot be fed through the RADPF, use the Platen store mode. + AMS is automatically selected. Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 will be selected. (This setting can be released.) Combination Specifications RADF to be used. (When copying from the platen glass, selectthe Store mode.) RADF capacity Original paper size Tray paper size Print quantity Advice : 50 max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode. : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"x11" : A3, B4, AGR, A4, B5R, B5, A5SR*, 8.5"X11"R (80g/m° paper recommended) : 999 sets max. # Load A5 size paper in lengthwise feed (11) only. Incompatible If any ofthe following copying conditions are going to be set, the Combination may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. APS Image quality (Very high) Sheet/Cover insertion Chapter Booklet Image insert Dual page Mixed original Repeat image Frame/F old erasure Auto layout Non image area erase

Procedure Set Copying Conditions

[Fe Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application Selection screen. Touch “Combination” key on the Application Selection screen. The Combination Mode Selection screen will be displayed. Combination Mode Selection screen Application Selection screen Select &pplication Finition Dane)

Touch any of “2 in 1”, “4 in 1”, or “8 in 1” key, referring to the table below. Touch either key between the two in the Layout area, referring to the table below. Advice To return to the initial condition, touch “CANCEL” key. GEL 5] Layout Original 2inl 4inl 8inl 2inl 8inl Portrait type 1/2 113 Ko 12/34 113{5 11? sers |° 2lal618 3 |4 2/4 Landscape type 11/2 115 Konica 1/2/{3/a 1131/2716 3/4 fs 6 2/43 /7 RE a 8 Touch “OK” key to restore the Application Selection screen. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When copying more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode or Platen store mode. Touch “Store Mode” key to highlight it. Advice To clear all application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored. Touch “OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

9. AMS is automatically selected.

Touch the “PAPER SIZE ”key on the Basic screen to display the Tray Selection screen, then touch and reverse the desired tray key. Touch “OK” key to return to the Basic screen. Tray Selection screen Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to enter the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR BRIE [a]

Lo] ENG. SA Cr] ga a Place Original(s)...FACE UP 1 Putoriginals in the order of pagination, and place originals FACE UP in the RADF. 50 sheets max. can be loaded.

2. Alignthe frontoriginal guide to originals.

Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8. Fe] Combination

Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF store mode: To copy a setof more than 50 originals, use RADPF store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-8 to p. 7-10 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Platen store mode: To copy originals that cannot be fed through the RADF onto both sides of copy paper, use Platen store mode. Touch and highlightthe “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-4 to p. 7-7 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies L Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copyin Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on RADF ST ur are all scanned and discharged, then output job starts in ETC succession. 2] G] When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to 5] [6] © start the output job. TOPTCTERR To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned B] IE data in the memory will be cleared. D a de. 4 fr After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. le”

JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following. Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case ofthe copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Combination mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch “Combination” key and then touch “OK” key. To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. Torestore the initial copying conditions, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel. Fe] Combination

Booklet copying is used to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of paper. 1-sided originals 1 2 3 al «1| 48) Booklet copying ! ! ann (Left binding) Ji a ii E a : Æ 1 a8i1 46,3 26/23 2-sided originals | | | N. | l Le a ke Je Basic rules for Booklet *_ Theinitial setting of the binding side is to the left. Key operator can change the binding side to the right. See p. 11-45 to p. 11-48. Booklet copying i | | {Right binding) = 5 = | 18 suc + Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively. Advice If memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre. *_ Use the Store mode in the following conditions. When the number of originals are more than 50, use the RADF store mode. When copying the originals that cannot be fed through the RADF, use the Platen store mode. + AMS is automatically selected. *_ The total page countofthe originals should basically be multiples of 4. Ifnot, blank pages will be inserted automatically. + Copying mode is either 12 or 22. Booklet Specifications RADF to be used. (When copying from the platen glass, selectthe Platen store mode.) RADF capacity : 50 max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode. Original paper size : A3, B4, AGR, A4, B5, 8.5"x11" Tray paper size : A3, B4, AGR, A4, B5R, B5, ASR, 8.5"x11"R (80g/m° paper recommended) Print quantity : Max. 999

5. Booklet (continued)

Incompatible If any of the following copying conditions are going to be set, the Booklet may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. E-sort Combination 11 OHP interleave 2»1 Mixed original Staple-sort Repeat Group Auto layout APS Thin/Thick paper Reserve Image shift Image quality (Very high) Sheet/Cover insertion Non image area erase Procedure El Load Copy Paper: A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"x11"R Load any one of A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, ASR, or 8.5"x11"R paper in a tray. Set Copying Conditions 1 Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode.

2. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application

Selection screen. Touch “Booklet” key on the Application Selection screen. The Booklet key will be reversed, and the incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity. Application Selection screen Function ihance Chapter jun, ER CT EN En ir, Mlrereriels Sc Es ae Advice To return to the initial condition, touch “CANCEL”key. The Basic screen will be restored. When selecting the Image shift, the copy image as illustrated right is printed. (1) Touch “Image Shift” key. The Image Shift Mode Selection screen will be displayed. (2) Touch “Reduce & Shift’key. ‘Image Shift’key cannot be selected. (3) Select the desired shift amount (1 to 250 mm). It cannot be selected the amount of Front and Back individually. (4) Touch “OK” key on the Image Shift Mode Selection screen. The Application Selection screen will be restored. See p. 9-27 to p. 9-35 for details. Chapter Chapter + Reduce & Shift re] Booklet

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 5. Booklet (continued)

5. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When copying more than 50 originals,

use RADF store mode or Platen store mode. Touch “Store Mode” key to highlight it. Advice To clear all application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored. Touch “OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored. AMS is automatically selected. Touch the “PAPER SIZE ”key on the Basic screen to display the Tray Selection screen, then touch a desired paper size key on the Tray Selection screen to select any one from A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, or 8.5"x11"R.

8. Touch the “COPY MODE” key on the Basic screen to display the Copy Mode screen,

then touch to select either 12 or 2B 2 copying mode. Touch “OK” key to return to the Basic screen.

Tray Selection screen Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to enter the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR OQTY. button and enter the correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen ma em O0 © ne) our Joe ver] D: | FREE LE GET. SA le"

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 5. Booklet (continued)

Place Original(s)...FACE UP L PutA3, B4, A4R, A4, B5, or 8.5"x11"R = size originals in the order of pagination, 5 and place them FACE UP in the RADF. nl The total page count of originals should pl basically be multiples of 4. If not, blank il || pages will be inserted automatically as the last pages. 50 sheets max. can be loaded. E&

2. Alignthe frontoriginal guide to originals.

Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8. Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF store mode: To copy a setof more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-8 to p. 7-10 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Platen store mode: To copy originals that cannot be fed through the RADF onto both sides of copy paper, use Platen store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-4 to p. 7-7 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies L Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen. Cr

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copyin Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on RADF Fm TT are all scanned and discharged, then output job starts in © ON OFF succession. 2] G3] When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to start the output job. 5] Le] © TOPTCLERR To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned 8] [9] data in the memory will be cleared. 5 A dE OS [nr After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. 8-27 |

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 5. Booklet (continued)

JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following. Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) JA CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case of the copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. *_ To release Booklet mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch ‘Booklet” key and then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. *_ Torestore the initial copying conditions, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel. le"

OHP Interleave copying is used to copy onto OHP transparent films and insert regular copy paper between films to prevent them from sticking to each other. OHP Interleave copying features the following two modes. + Blank sheetinterleaving: Insert blank copy paper. + Copy sheet interleaving: Copythe same image as on OHP transparent film onto copy paper and insert them between films. The copied interleaf sheet can be used as reference during presentations. : Konica. Konica Konica Konica | Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica med Original Blank sheet Interleaving Copy sheet Interleaving Basic rules for OHP Interleave copying

• Use the Store mode in the following conditions. When the number of originals are more than 50, use the RADF store mode. When copying the originals that cannot be fed through the RADPF, use the Platen store mode. Booklet Load OHP transparent films into the Multi-sheet bypass tray. HP Machine with Finisher discharges transparency into tray 1, 2, or 3 by Non-sort only. EVE) APS (1:1) is automatically selected. 12 and 22 modes are incompatible. The print quantity is always set as 1. When selecting Finisher tray 1, the machine discharges by Face Up and Non-sortmodes. OHP Interleave Copying Specifications RADF to be used (Select P laten store mode when copying from the platen glass). RADF capacity : 50 max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at à time using Store mode. Original paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5SR, B5, A5R, 8.5"x11" Tray paper size : AR, A4 (80g/m° paper recommended) Print quantity 11 "P]

Incompatible If any of the following copying conditions are going to be set, the OHP Interleave copying may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. Using the Finisher Chapter 1»2 Booklet 2»2 Image insert APS Mixed original Image quality (Very high) Repeat Interrupt Thin/Thick paper Sheet/Cover insertion Procedure Load TransparentFilm: Multi-S heet Bypass Tray Insert a sheet of OHP transparent film of the same size as that of originals into the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT load OHP transparent films into any other tray. It will cause paper jam. Load Interleave Paper: Tray 1, 2, 3, or 4 Load Tray 1, 2, 3 or 4 with copy paper the same size as that of OHP transparent film. Set Copying Conditions

Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application Selection screen. Touch “OHP Interleave” key on the Application Selection screen. The OHP Interleave Mode Selection screen will be displayed. LL OHP Interleave Mode Selection screen Application Selection screen OHP function ication Finition Cite [| (eowef one LX | CANCEL Touch “Blank Sheet Interleaving” or “Copy Sheet Interleaving” key. Advice To return to the initial condition, touch “CANCEL'”key. The Application Selection screen will be restored. Touch “OK” key on the OHP Interleave Mode Selection screen. The Application Selection screen will be restored.

6. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When copying more than 50 originals,

use RADF store mode or Platen store mode. Touch “Store Mode” key to highlight it. Advice To clear all application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

7. Touch “OK”key onthe Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

AMS is automatically selected. To copy in different magnification ratio, display the Lens Mode screen to select the desired magnification. Basic screen Lens Mode screen Enter Print Quantity The print quantity is always set as 1. Place Original(s)...FACE UP L Putoriginals in the order of pagination, and place them FACE UP inthe RADF. 50 sheets max. can be loaded.

2. Alignthe frontoriginal guide to originals.

Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8. Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF store mode: To copy a setof more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-8 to p. 7-10 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Platen store mode: To copy originals that cannot be fed through the RADF onto both sides of copy paper, use Platen store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-4 to p. 7-7 for details. 8-31 | OHP Interieave.

Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies L Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copyin Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on RADF | A0 ne | © POWER SAVER ONIOFF are all scanned and discharged, then output job starts in succession. 2 | G] When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to start the output job. 5][6] To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned 8 | Lo] data in the memory will be cleared. After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will p| (A be cleared. CRE D Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the followi Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray e exittray capacity is 100 sheets. exit tray while copying before the do so will cause the cop jam.

• To release OHP Interleave mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch “OHP Interleave” key and then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. *_ Torestore the initial copying conditions, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel.

Image Insertis used to combine images scanned from the platen glass with images scanned from RADF. Then, output the combined images as a finished set.

nsertion originals Place originals onto RADF N Eu D NS Co NS Place originals onto RADF Basic rules for Image Insert + Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively. Advice If memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre.

• Use the RADF store mode to scan first the originals to have insertions.

• Use the Platen store mode to scan next the originals to be inserted.

• The Store mode is available only when used as above. Image Insert Specifications Inériève RADF capacity : 50 max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned atatime | imageinsat using Store mode. Insertions :15 max. Page range of insertions : p. 1 to p. 999 Original paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R Tray paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice

• Load A5 paper in lengthwise feed (13) only. Fe]

Incompatible If any of the following copying conditions are going to be set, the Image Insert copying may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. Store mode Dual page Reserve Mixed original Image quality (Very high) Repeat Sheet/Cover insertion Auto layout Chapter Image shift Combination Non image area erase OHP interleave Procedure Set Copying Conditions

Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application Selection screen. Touch “Image Insert” key on the Application Selection screen. The Image Insertion Setting screen will be displayed. Image Insertion Setting screen Application Selection screen Select Application Funct ior

CU ML . Enter the page numbers to insert images. (1) Use the Ten keys to enter the page numbers. The entered page number will be displayed on the screen. Touch “SET” key to store an entry, or “DELETE” key to clear the entry. (2) Repeatthis for each page number you want to insert. You can setup to 15 entries within p. 1 to p. 999. Having Problems? To clear an incorrect entry, touch “DELETE” key on the screen or the CLEAR QTY. button on the Operation panel, touch “SET” key and re-enter the correct page number. Advice + When the page number specified is larger than the total original page count, the entry will be invalid.

• Image insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are entered from the smaller page number. + Entering the same page number more than once will have plural insertions in that position. Advice To return to the original condition set before change, touch “CANCEL" key.

(3) Touch “Booklet” key on the Image Insertion Setting screen to use this function. (4) When all entries are made, touch “OK” key.

5. Application Selection screen will be restored. The “Store Mode” key is automatically

6. As required, set the other copying conditions.

Advice To clear all application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR" key.

7. Touch “OK”key onthe Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

Basic screen Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear allthe copier settings. Image Insert Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR Î DE à L LAIfANLSI Le Î [loi GET. SA PPPLCA TION re]

RADF: Place/Scan Original(s)..FACE UP Originals 1 Close the RADF securely.

2. Putoriginals in order of pagination, and

place originals FACE UP in the RADF. 50 sheets max. can be loaded. Please Be Reminded! Ifthe number oforiginals exceeds 50, use RADF store mode. Divide the originals into blocks notexceeding 50 sheets, then load them from the block with the first page.

3. Align the original guides to the originals.

Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8.

4. Touchthe “SCAN”key onthe Basic screen. The originals will be scanned and delivered

into the RADF exit tray. “Load originals in the RADF Press SCAN to scan originals” and “Place images for insertion on the Platen glass” massages are displayed alternately. Basic screen

5. Repeat steps 1. to 4, until all the originals are scanned.

Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. Platen Glass: Place/Scan Original(s)..FACE DOWN Insertion Pages

7. Place the original to be inserted on the platen glass.

Please Be Reminded! Place and scan the originals in order of pagination. 8 Close the RADF securely. le"

9. Touch the “SCAN” key on the Basic screen.

“Place images for insertion on the Platen glass” and "STORE key: Scan START key : Start’ massages are displayed alternately. Basic screen

10. Repeat steps 6. to 9. until all the originals are scanned.

Advice After scanning the original, the magnification ratio can be changed before pressing the START PRINT button for printing all the page collectively. Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. Start Copyin Press the START PRINT button. All scanned images are ed i : Dons copied in succession. O ONOFr To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned 2| [3] data in the memory will be cleared.

After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will 3 CS] be cleared. B][9] pl[e) LO dE 7 [nr Image Insert F?]

JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following. Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) JA CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case of the copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Image insert mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch ‘Image Insert” key and then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key.

• To restore the initial copying conditions, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel. le"

Dual page is used to copy an open book, a large sheet, or two sheets placed side by side onto two sheets in 11 mode, or onto the front and back sides of one sheet in 12 mode to increase manual copying speed. The following three modes can be selected from the Dual Page Mode Selection screen. 1 Full Scan mode: Image division starts from the first scan. 2 Front Cover +Full Scan mode: Image division starts from the second scan, after the first scan copies normally. 3 Front/Back +Full Scan mode: Image division starts from the third scan, after the first and second scan copy normally. Set original 11 mode 12 mode

Basic rules for Dual Page

• The Store mode is selected automatically. Advice If memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre. + Copying mode is either 1B1 or 1} 2. + _ AMS is automatically selected. APS is incompatible. Dual Page Specifications Platen glass to be used (RADF cannot be used in Dual page mode). Scanned image capacity : 1,500 image max. at a time Original paper size : A3, B4, 11"x17" Tray paper size : A4, B5, 8.5"x11" (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Incompatible If any of the following copying conditions are going to be set, the Dual page may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. Using RADF 2»2 2»1 APS Reserve Image quality (Very high) RADF store mode Sheet/Cover insertion Combination Chapter Image insert Mixed original Reverse image Repeat Frame erasure Image shift re] Image Insert Dual Page

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 8. Dual Page (continued)

nm BR w Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application Selection screen. Touch “Dual Page” key on the Application Selection screen. The Dual Page Mode Selection screen will be displayed. Select either “OUTPUT L to R” or “OUTPUT R to L” key, and select either of the “facing page”, ‘front cover + facing page” or “front/back + facing page”, key. Touch “OK” key to return to the Application Selection screen. Application Selection screen Select Application Funct ior Dual Page Mode Selection screen fecing pages] Mes eee rune] sm ont cover d dacng _ CEE Add l EMI

Advice To return to the initial condition, touch “CANCEL”key. The Basic screen will be restored. The “Dual Page” key is reversed, and function keys are dimmed to show inactivity. The “Store Mode”, “AUTO Layout” and “Non Image Area Erase” keys are selected and reversed automatically. Application Selection screen + Application Functior one on | As required, set the other copy conditions. Advice To clear all application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored. Touch “OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 8. Dual Page (continued)

9. Touch “PAPER SIZE” key on the Basic screen to display the Tray Selection screen,

then touch the desired paper size key to select any one from A4, B5 or 8.5"x11". Touch “OK” key to return to the Basic screen.

10. Touch “COPY MODE” key on the Basic screen to display the Copy Mode screen, then

touch to select either 1B 1 or 12 copying mode. Touch “OK” key to return to the Basic screen. Copy Mode screeen Tray Selection screeen Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to enter the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR O O 1].àl

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 8. Dual Page (continued)

Place/Scan Original(s) on the Platen Glass...FACE DOWN 1 Open the RADF.

When selecting “front cover + facing pages”, first place the front cover, and then place the originals in reverse order of pagination. When selecting “front/back +facing pages”, first place the front cover and back cover in order, and then place the originals in reverse order of pagination. “front cover + facing pages” Scan from first page SURVETORS À REPORT “fr

• Place and scan the originals in order of pagination. + The Non image area erase is automatically selected. DO NOT close the RADF.

3. Touch the “SCAN” key on the Basic screen.

Repeat steps 1. to 3, Basic screen ginal in the PPPLCA TION Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. Start Copying FO HR Press the START PRINT button. All scanned images are copied in succession. b| [3] To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned 5| [6] data in the memory will be cleared.

After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared.

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 8. Dual Page (continued)

JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following. Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case ofthe copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. + _ To release Dual page mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch “Dual Page” key and then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. *_ Torestore the initial copying conditions, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel. Dual Page re]

Mixed original mode is used with RADF to copy mixed-size originals, to obtain the following two type of the finished set: Activated with Automatic Paper Selection mode : Copy paper will be automatically selected to match each original size. Activated with Automatic Magnification Selection function : Each original will be copied onto the copy paper ofthe selected size, with appropriate magnification ratio. APS mode Automatically select the paper of the same size as thatofthe original. E— AL Automatically select . magnification ratio Mixed size originals to copy onto the same paper in size. Basic rules for Mixed Original copying + Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively. Advice If memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre. *_ Use the Store mode in the following conditions. When the number of originals are more than 50, use the RADF store mode. When copying the originals that cannot be fed through the RADF, use the Platen store mode. + A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, and B5 size originals can be copied together. + _ APS is automatically selected. To select AMS, select the desired copy paper size. *_ When selecting Rotation mode, always select AMS. Mixed Original Mode Specifications RADF to be used (When copying from the platen glass, selectthe Store mode.) RADF capacity : 50 max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode. Original paper size : A3, B4, AGR, A4, B5R, B5 Tray paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*, 8.5"x11"R (80g/m?° recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice

• Load A5 size paper in horizontal feed ( [1 ) only.

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 9. Mixed Original (continued)

Incompatible If any of the following copying conditions are going to be set, the Mixed original mode may be cancelled orthe key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. E-sort OHP interleave Staple-sort (with APS) Image insert Image quality (Very high) Dual page Reserve (with APS) Repeat Sheet/Cover Insertion Auto layout Combination Image shift Booklet Non image area erase Procedure Set Copying Conditions 1 Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode.

2. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application

3. Touch “Mixed Original” key on the Application Selection screen. The “Mixed Original”

key will be reversed, and the incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity. Application Selection Screen + Application

1 PILE EDIT MS IMAGE EDIT

ETS ES Advice To return to the initial state, touch “CANCEL"” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

4. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When copying more than 50 originals,

use RADF store mode or Platen store mode. Touch “Store Mode” key to highlight it. Advice To clear all application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

5. Touch “OK”key onthe Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 9. Mixed Original (continued)

6. APS is automatically selected. Select the desired magnification, if required.

When selecting AMS instead of APS, touch “PAPER SIZE” key on the Basic screen to display the Tray Selection screen, then touch the desired paper size key. Touch “OK” key to return to the Basic screen. Tray Selection screen Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to enter the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen al in the DATA ERROR »| OO ) Han E PAU E 1 Fe, EN. SA je"

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 9. Mixed Original (continued)

E Place Original(s) on RADF..FACE UP Close the RADF securely. ? Put originals in order of pagination. Setthe A3 and B4 size originals in lengthwise feed (11) direction. The others are available in either direction. Place originals FACE UP, aligning to the back left corner of the RADF. Align the original guides to originals.

Align originals to the back left corner. Supplement 1: Using Store mode RADF store mode: To copy a setof more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-8 to p. 7-10 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Platen store mode: To copy originals that cannot be fed through the RADF, use Platen store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-4 to p. 7-7 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies A Gal L Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. F°]

Section 8 : Special Copying : Page Editing 9. Mixed Original (continued)

Start Copyin Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on RADF [Er are all scanned and discharged, then output job starts in oO succession. b] El When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to start the output job. p] Ce] nn | POWER SAVER To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned 8] EX! data in the memory will be cleared. . p] a CN SA | After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. AA CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity of the Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the followi Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Trey In the case ofthe copier witl Be sure to remo maximum capac After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function.

• To release Mixed original mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch ‘Mixed Original” key and then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. *_ Torestore the initial copying conditions, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel. je"

Section 9: Special Copying: Copy Image

1. Text/Photo Enhance

This mode can enhance the reproducibility of half tone and give an image closer to that of the original. It can be effected in the following modes: Text mode : Use this mode to improve the contrast in comparison to using the general mode. Photo mode : Use this mode to reproduce a half-tone photo image. The copy will closely represent the half-tones of the original image. Increase Contrast mode : Use this mode to darken lightly printed image (e.g., pencil) without changing background exposure. dx à Konica Konica Original Standard Photo mode D Konica Comraton Konica Corporation || Konica Corporation Konica Corparaton Kanca Corporation || Konlea Corpration Konica Corparation Kanca Corporation || Kolea Coraratien Kana Coponton Ken Corenäen | | Ken Coporten GR EE : ea Corporation Kanca Corporation || Konles Corar rigina ndar ncrease Kane Copies D Kén coronten | | ne Conan contrast mode Konica Corparation Kanica Corporation || Konles Corparation Konica Corparaton Kanca Corporation || Konlea Coraratien Konica Corporation Kanica Corporation || Konica Corporation Original Standard Textmode Advice The copied image cannot be better than the original. Advice The density level can be shifted by three levels to darker or two levels to lighter in each ofthe four (Normal (text/photo), Text, Photo, and Increase Contrast) modes. See p. 6- 26 to p. 6-27. Text/Photo Enhance Specifications RADF capacity : 50 sheets max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode. Original paper size: A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"x11"R Tray paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5*, 8.5"X11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/ m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sheets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (17) only. Incompatible None

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 1. Text/Photo Enhance (continued)

Procedure Set Copying Conditions 1 Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode.

2. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application

3. Touch ‘Text/Photo Enhance” key on the Application Selection screen. The Text/

Photo Enhance screen will be displayed. Application Selection screen Text/Photo Enhance screen Text? Ce Les ON

4. Touch and reverse either of the “PHOTO”, ‘TEXT”, or “INCREASE CONTRAST" key.

5. Touch “OK” key to return to the Application Selection screen.

Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

6. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When using Store mode, touch ‘Store

Mode” key on the Applicarion Selection screen. Advice To clear all the application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

7. Touch “OK”key onthe Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR ginal in the 11210] ” BITALS) L,

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 1. Text/Photo Enhance (continued)

Place Original(s).. FACE UP in RADF FACE DOWN on Platen glass Place the original(s) in the RADF or on the Platen glass. Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8. S7_ Supplement 1: Using Store mode To use Store mode (using Platen glass or RADF), see p. 7-2 to 7-10 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies 1 Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copyin Press the START PRINT button. ERROR ne | © POWER SAVER When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to start the output job. 2 To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned data in the memory will be cleared. After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. D CERN SH nr

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 1. Text/Photo Enhance (continued)

JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) AN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case ofthe copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Text/P hoto enhance mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch the reversed ‘Text/Photo Enhance” key, then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. + To resetcopying conditions to the initial condition, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation pane TextPhoto Enhance

Use Reverse image to reverse the image from black-on-white to white-on-black, and vice versa. Original Konica Konica 2 Konica Konica Konica Reverse Image copying Reveres Image Specifications RADF capacity Original paper size Tray paper size Print quantity Advice : 50 sheets max. 1,500 images max. can be scanned at a time using Store mode. : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, AS5R, 8.5"x11" : A3,B4,A4R,A4,B5R, B5, A5R*, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/ m? paper recommended) : 999 sheets max.

• A5 is available in horizontal feed ( 2) only. Incompatible Auto layout Non image area erase Procedure E set Copying Conditions Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button to setthe RADF mode. Z Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application Selection screen.

3. Touch and reverse the “Reverse Image” key on the Application Selection screen. The

“Reverse Image” key will be reversed, and the incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity. Application Selection screen à Function FILED Dar EDIT Case 2 |

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 2. Reverse Image (continued)

Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

3. As required, set the other copying conditions. When using Store mode, touch ‘Store

Mode” key on the Applicarion Selection screen. Advice To clear all the application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

4. Touch “OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen 1 De ue = Ü Ge À LI] AE L. : G ‘| ŒlLolle] CENQN. SA Place Original(s).. FACE UP in RADF FACE DOWN on Platen glass Place the original(s) in the RADF or on the Platen glass. Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p. 6-8.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 2. Reverse Image (continued)

Supplement 1: Using Store mode To use Store mode (using Platen glass or RADF), see p. 7-2 to 7-10 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies 1 Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. FO Poe ON OFF. When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to 2] G] start the output job. To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned 5] [] data in the memory will be cleared. 8] [o] After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. pl[el CZ A NT A CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity of the Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following. Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, 8.5"x13", A5R)

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 2. Reverse Image (continued)

JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case ofthe copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Reverse image mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch the reversed “Reverse Image” key, then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. *_ To resetcopying conditions to the initial condition, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel. Reverse Image

Use this function to repeat the original image down the page. The following two modes are provided for each occasion: Manual Setting mode : Repeat the original image within the selected image area of the platen glass. Auto Setting mode : Repeatthe area detected as the whole original placed onto the platen glass by activating Non image area erase. Manual setting mode Auto setting mode va aus Horiz. width me MÈRE me niCa = NniCa D Ko Ko Ko Konica > Konica Ko Ko Ko Original Konica Original Repeat copying Repeat copying Basic rules for Repeat copying *_ Both vertical and horizontal widths of the image area in Manual Setting mode can be selected from 10 mm to 150 mm. + Scanning area in Auto Setting mode is A3 to 10 mm x10 mm. + Only 11 copying mode is available. Having Problems? Auto setting mode in Repeat may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case consult your Service Centre about appropriate place for installation. Repeat Specifications Platen glass to be used (RADF cannot be used.) Repeat width :10 mm to 150 mm Scanning area : A3 to 10 mm x 10 mm Copy paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*, 8.5"x11"R (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity _: 999 sheets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (17) only.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 3. Repeat (continued)

Incompatible If any of the following copying conditions are going to be set, the Repeat may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing selection. Using RADF Chapter E-sort Booklet Using Finisher OHP interleave 132 (available only with Store mode) Image insert 2»2 Dual page 2»1 Mixed original APS Reverse image (with AUTO selected) AMS Frame/F old erasure Image quality (Very high) Auto layout Sheet/Cover insertion Image shift Combination Non image area erase (with Verti./horiz. selected) Procedure Set Copying Conditions 1 Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button.

2. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel to display the Application

3. Touch “Repeat” key on the Application Selection screen. The Repeat Mode Selection

screen will be displayed. Application Selection screen Repeat Mode Selection screen Fi]

4. To select the Manual setting mode:

(1) Touch “Vert./horiz.” key. Re (2) Use the À Upper arrow/Y Lower arrow key to adjustthe vertical/horizontal width of the repeat image, from 10 mm to 150 mm in 1 mm increments. (3) Touch “OK” key. To select the Auto setting mode: (1) Touch “AUTO” key. Non image area erase will be automatically selected. (2) Touch “OK” key. Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 3. Repeat (continued)

5. The Application Selection screen will be restored.

6. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When using Store mode, touch ‘Store

Mode” key on the Applicarion Selection screen. Advice To clear all the application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

7. Touch ‘OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to enter the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR QelB]) © FE CRT Place Original(s) on the platen glass FACE DOWN Manual Setting mode The scanning area in both vertical and horizontal widths is to be measured from the rear left corner of the A3 original area indicated on the left edge of the platen glass. 1 Open the RADF.

2. Positionthe originalFACE DOWN onthe platen glass, so thatthe image to be repeated

should fall within the scanning area.

3. Close the RADF securely.

Manual setting mode Repeat Image copying Horiz. width

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 3. Repeat (continued)

Auto Setting mode The scanning area is automatically detected by the copier with Non image area erase activated. 1 Open the RADF.

2. Position the original of the desired size FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

Please Be Reminded! DO NOT CLOSE the RADF to activate the Non image area erase. Having Problems? Auto setting mode in Repeat may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case consult your Service Centre about appropriate place for installation. Auto setting mode Repeat Image copying Konica Ko Konica Ko Konica Ko Konica Ko Supplement 1: Using Store mode To use Store mode (using Platen glass or RADF), see p. 7-2 to 7-10 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies L Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. S. Fra

When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to start the output job. 2] (3] To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned 5] Ce] data in the memory will be cleared. 8] Ce] After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will 0 A be cleared. GENE. Sn NT

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 3. Repeat (continued)

JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) JA CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case of the copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Repeat mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch the reversed “Repeat” key, then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key.

• To resetcopying conditions to the initial condition, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation pane

4. Frame/Fold Erasure

If a thick original like a book is placed on the Platen glass and copied, sometimes it can happen that the copy will be shaded at the edge and down the center. If the Frame/Fold erasure function is used the shaded portion around the copied image and down the centre can be erased, to prevent excessive toner consumption. Frame + + Frame eresure jf St SJ erasure Frame Fold Frame erasure erasure erasure General copying Frame Erasure Fold Erasure Frame/Fold Erasure copying copying Copying Basic rules for Frame/Fold Erasure copying *_ The original is placed onto the RADF or on the platen glass. Frame/Fold Erasure Specifications Frame erasure width : 1 mm to 15 mm in 1 mm increments default setting; 5 mm Frame original size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, ASR, 8.5"x11" Frame copy paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5SR*, 8.5"x11"R (80g/m? paper recommended) Fold erasure width: 1 mm to 30 mm in 1 mm increments default setting; 10 mm Fold original size : A3, B4, AGR, B5R, 8.5"x11"R Fold copy paper size : A3, B4, A4R, B5R, A5R*, 8.5"x11"R Print quantity : 999 sheets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible with Frame erasure Combination Repeat Incompatible with Fold erasure Combination Booklet Dual page Mixed original Repeat

Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel, to display the Application Selection screen. Touch ‘Frame/Fold Erasure” key on the Application Selection screen. The Frame/ Fold Erasure Mode Selection screen will be displayed. Application $ Selection screen Framefr old Erasure Mode Selection screen

Touch “Frame Erasure” key, then use arrow keys to selectthe desired frame erasure amount, from 1-15 mm in 1 mm increments. Touch “Fold Erasure” key, then use arrow keys to select the desired fold erasure amount, from 1-30 mm in 1 mm increments. Touch “Frame Erasure” key and ‘Fold Erasure” key to copy both modes. Touch “OK” key to complete the setting. The Application Selection screen will be restored. As required, set the other copy conditions. When using Store mode, touch “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. Touch “OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored. Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to enter the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR OQTY. button and enter the correct number.

Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen oara error [| P riginal in the R

Place Original(s).. FACE UP in RADF FACE DOWN on Platen glass Place the original(s) in the RADF or on the Platen glass. Advice For details of how to place the original, see p. 6-8. Advice Do not press too strongly when the placed original is of thick paper, as it will be kept under the pressure of the RADF. If originals become skew when the RADF is closed, keep RADF opened. Supplement 1: Using Store mode To use Store mode (using Platen glass or RADF), see p. 7-2 to 7-10 for details. Supplement 2e Checking copying conditions/printed copies Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen. Z Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Start Copying

JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m° paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) JA CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case of the copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Frame/Fold erasure mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch the reversed “Frame/Fold Erasure” key, then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key.

• To resetcopying conditions to the initial condition, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation pane

Use this function to detect the image area of the original on the platen glass and centre the whole image on the copy paper. Konica Konica Auto layout Place original Basic rules for Auto layout Only 11 copying mode is available. (When using the Store mode, 1B 2 copying mode is also available.) APS and AMS are automatically released. Use platen glass. (RADF cannot be used.) Non image area erase is automatically set. (Non image area erase can be released manually.) Having Problems? Auto layout may notoperate properly ifthe lighting in the work place is directly overthe platen glass. In this case, consult your Service Centre about an appropriate place for installation. Auto Layout Specifications Original paper size :A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"x11" Tray paper size :A3,B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5SR*, 8.5"X11"R (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity :999 sets max. Advice # A5 is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible If any ofthe following copying conditions are going to be set, the Auto Layout may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. . . Using RADF Sheet/Cover insertion E-sort Chapter Staple-sort Combination 132 (available with the Store mode) Booklet 2»2 Image insert 2»1 Mixed original APS Reverse image AMS Repeat Image quality (Very high) Image shift

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 5. Auto Layout (continued)

Procedure Set Copying Conditions

Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel. The Application Selection screen will be displayed. Touch “AUTO Layout” key on the Application Selection screen. The “AUTO layout” key will be reversed, and the incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity. Application Selection screen Es a Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL” key. The Basic screen will be restored. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When using Store mode, touch “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. Advice When using the Dual page together and copying the original smaller than the copy paper, the image is copied on the copy paper in the centre. Advice To clear all the application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored. Touch “OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored. APS and AMS are automatically released. Select the desired paper size and the magnification on the Tray Selection screen and Lens Mode screen. Tray Selection screen Lens Mode screen et Lu ( Ress USERSETT

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 5. Auto Layout (continued)

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press CLEAR QTY. button and enterthe correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen oara error || © ginal in th Fou O oO w G20 & GA L CrILojLe] ÉURE PPPLCA TION EE ÿ mn a Place Original(s) on the platen glass FACE DOWN 1 Open the RADF.

2. Place the original on the platen glass.

Please Be Reminded! ° ed Ï DO NOT close the RADF. Having Problems? Auto layout may notoperate properly ifthe lighting in the work place is directly overthe platen glass. In this case, consult your Service Centre about an appropriate place for installation. Supplement 1: Using Platen store mode To use Platen store mode, see p. 7-2 to 7-10 for details. RETESE Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies 1 Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 5. Auto Layout (continued)

Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. _

POWER SAVER When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to e —J start the output job. 2] G1 ATERRUPT To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned 5] [6] data in the memory will be cleared. B] LD] After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will p pyIng y p] Ù be cleared. de A fr ZA CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the followi Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) AA CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case ofthe copier witl Be sure to remove the maximum capacity is reai After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Auto layout mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch the reversed “AUTO Layout” key, then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. *_ To resetcopying conditions to the initial condition, press the AUTO RESET button onthe Operation panel.

6. Thin/Thick Paper Mode

Use this function to select the appropriate mode when the original paper is thin or thick. Thin Paper Mode There are occasions when the copy paper is thinner than normal. Ifthis is the case, using the Thin paper mode will reduce the likelihood of paper jams occurring. Thick Paper Mode There are occasions when the copy paper is heavier or thicker than normal. If this is the case, using the Thick paper mode will produce à more stable image. Advice When copying onto the reproducible paper, do not select the thin paper mode. Basic rules for Thin/Thick Paper Copying *_ Paper source is Multi-sheet bypass tray only (single feed mode). Thin /Thick Paper Mode Specifications Original paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, ASR, 8.5"x11" Tray paper size : A3,B4, A4R, A4,B5R,B5, A5R*, 8.5"X11"R, 8.5"x11" (80g/ m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sheets max. Copy paper weight : Thin paper; 50 to 59g/m? Thick paper; 91 to 130g/m° Loading capacity : Multi-sheet bypass tray; one sheet Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible If any ofthe following copying conditions are going to be set, the Thin/Thick paper mode may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. 1»2 Staple-sort 2»2 Sheet/Cover insertion E-sort Chapter Sort Booklet Group OHP interleave "e] Auto Layout Thin/Thick Paper

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 6. Thin/Thick Paper Mode (continued)

Procedure Set Copying Conditions

Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel, to display the Application Selection screen. Touch ‘Thin/Thick Paper” key on the Application Selection screen. The Thin/Thick Paper Mode Selection screen will be displayed. Application Selection screen plication Function Thin/Thick P aper Mode Selection screen CANCEL To copy on Thin paper, touch ‘THIN PAPER” key. To copy on Thick paper, touch ‘THICK PAPER” key. Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL” key. The Basic screen will be restored. Touch “OK” key on the Thin/Thick Paper Mode Selection screen. The Application Selection screen will be restored. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When using Store mode, touch “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. Advice To clear allthe application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR"” key. The Basic screen will be restored. Touch “OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored. Load Copy Paper onto Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray One sheet of the thin or thick paper can be loaded onto Multi-sheet bypass tray.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 6. Thin/Thick Paper Mode (continued)

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR O0 © # GIRIE] Le GAL L CrILojLe] ÉURE EE ÿ mn a Place Original(s).. FACE UP in RADF FACE DOWN on Platen glass Place the original(s) in the RADF or on the Platen glass. Advice For details of how to place the originals, see p.6-8. “Thin/Thick Paper Supplement 1: Using Store mode To use Store mode (using Platen glass or RADF), see p. 7-2 to 7-10 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies 1 Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch "EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 6. Thin/Thick Paper Mode (continued)

Start Copying Press the START PRINT button. When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to start the output job. 2 To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned P data in the memory will be cleared. After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. ZA CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following. Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) A CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Trey In the case ofthe copier witl Be sure to remove the maximum capacity is reai After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Thin/Thick paper mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch the reversed ‘Thin/Thick Paper” key, then touch “OK” key.

• To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. *_ To resetcopying conditions to the initial condition, press the AUTO RESET button onthe Operation panel.

Image shift copying shifts the image to create a binding margin when originals have no binding margin. Image shift features two modes as described below. Shift mode: Shifts the image to create a binding margin. Reduce & shift mode: Reduces the overall image when binding margin is likely to cause image loss. —> Shift fl = n — Konica Konica Reduce Konica Konica Konica —+ Konica : n Konica Konica Konica Konica Reduce Original Shift copying Shift & reduce î copying Basic rules for Image Shift copying + Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively. Advice If memory overflow frequently occurs, you are recommended to extend the memory. Contact your Service Centre.

• Use the Store mode in the following conditions. When the number of originals are more than 50, perform the RADF store mode. When copying the originals that cannot be fed through the RADF, perform the Platen store mode. + _ For Reduce & shift mode, the reduction ratio depends on the amount of shift. + _ When selecting 1R1, the binding margin should be created on the left of each copied sheet. + When selecting 22, the binding margin should be created on the leftof odd original and on the right of even original. + _ When selecting 12, Image shift has the following two methods: To copy the 1-sided originals without the binding margin, the binding margin should be created on the left side of the front page and on the right side of the back page. To copy the 1-sided originals with the binding margin, the binding margin should be created on the right of the even original only. + _ When selecting 2k1, Image shift has the following two methods: To copy the 2-sided originals without the binding margin, the binding margin should be created at the left side of all the pages. To copy the 2-sided originals with the binding margin, the binding margin should be created at the left side of back page only.

“Thin/Thick Paper Image Shift

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 7. Image Shift (continued)

Image Shift Specifications Amount of shift :-250 mm to 250 mm in 1 mm increments (-250 mm to 0 mm: for right binding, O mm to 250 mm: for left binding) Original paper size : A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"x11" Tray paper size :A3,B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, ASR, 8.5"X11"R (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed (17) only. Incompatible with Shift Mode If any ofthe following copying conditions is going to be set, the Image shift may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. Image quality (Very high) Mixed original Booklet Repeat Image insert Auto layout Dual page Non image area erase Incompatible with Reduce & Shift Mode If any ofthe following copying conditions is going to be set, the Image shift may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. Changing magnification Dual page Vertical/Horizontal zoom Mixed original APS Repeat Image quality (Very high) Auto layout Image insertion Non image area erase Procedure Set Copying Conditions 1 Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button.

2. Select the desired copy mode on the Copy Mode screen.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 7. Image Shift (continued)

3. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel. The Application Selection

screen will be displayed.

4. Touch “Image Shift’ key on the Application Selection screen. The Image Shift Mode

Selection screen will be displayed. Application Selection screen Image Shift Mode Selection screen

FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT

5. To select the Image shift:

(1) Touch “Image Shift” key. (2) Touch the A Upper arrow or Y Lower arrow key next to AMOUNT (FRONT) to select the desired shift amount of the front page. Selecting the amount between 0 mm and 250 mm will create the left binding margin. Selecting the amount between -250 mm and 0 mm will create the right binding margin. (3) Touch the upper or lower arrow key nextto AMOUNT (BACK) to selectthe desired shift amount of the back page. Selecting the amount between 0 mm and 250 mm will create the left binding margin. Selecting the amount between -250 mm and 0 mm will create the right binding margin. Advice Select carefully the front and back margins according to the copy mode selected in step 2. Image Shift Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL” key. The Application Selection screen will be restored. "P]

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 7. Image Shift (continued)

To select the Reduce & shift: (1) Touch “Reduce & Shift” key. (2) Touch the A Upper arrow or À Lower arrow key next to AMOUNT to selectthe desired shift amount. Selecting the amount between 0 mm and 250 mm will create the left binding margin. Selecting the amount between -250 mm and 0 mm will create the right binding margin. Advice The desired shift amount cannot be selected individually for front and back pages within Reduce & Shift mode. Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL” key. The Application Selection screen will be restored.

6. Touch “OK”key on the Image Shift Mode Selection screen. The Application Selection

screen will be restored. 7, As required, setthe other copying conditions. When copying more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode or Platen store mode. Touch “Store Mode” key to highlight it. Advice To clear allthe application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR" key. The Basic screen will be restored.

8. Touch “OK”key on the Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct number. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen Qeb] © ENIE Ci

. Image Shift (continued) 1 Basedonthe setcopying conditions, set originals on RADF. Advice Be careful of the margin side of the original. For details of how to place the originals, see p.6-8. Copy mode: 1} 1, Using RADF [Place originals onto RADF] [mage shift copying (1 to n) [Image shift copying (n to 1) ] <& ï oi | [Bottom] margin Copy mode: 1} 2, Using RADF Creating Image shift copying (ton) {nto1) binding margin | [Place originals onto RADF First fed original

(I | 2 Binding [Bottom] 1 WHENON ” Binding margin

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 7. Image Shift (continued)

Advice In duplex copying of the 1-sided originals that already have a left binding margin, shift the image ofthe back pages by setting the desired shift amount plus the original margin, to create the same margin as that of the front pages. Copy mode: 2} 2, Using RADF Place originals onto RADF 5 co Fistéeg [PIS N , À Image shift copying Image shift copying {n to 1) (ton) IBottom] GEng Binding margin margin Copy mode: 2R 1, Using RADF image shftcopying| [Image shit copying — {1ton) {nto 1) Firstfed original (il Da _

Binding 2 [Bottom] margin 1 1 Binding margin Adjust binding margin Image shift copying Image shift copying {ton) {nto1) Place originals onto RADF First fed original (D = 2 / Binding [Bottom] margin 1 Binding margin Advice In simplex copying of the 2-sided originals that already have a left binding margin, shift the image ofthe back pages by setting the desired shift amount plus the original margin, to create the same margin as that of the front pages.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 7. Image Shift (continued)

Supplement 1: Using RADF store mode To copy a setof more than 50 originals, use RADF store mode. Touch and highlight the “Store Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. See p. 7-8 to p. 7-10 for details. Please Be Reminded! Divide the originals into blocks not exceeding 50 sheets and load them from the block with the first page. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies L Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details. Press the START PRINT button. Originals loaded on FF RADF are all scanned and discharged, then printing job el starts in succession.

When using Store mode, press the START PRINT button to start the output job. 5] [6] ©

POWER SAVER TOFTCLERR To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. B][9] Scanned data in the memory will be cleared. pre] LO

After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. E Place Original(s) on Platen Glass...FACE DOWN / Start Copying

Open the RADF. Place the original on the platen glass. Advice Be careful of the margin side of the original. For details of how to place the originals, see p.6-8. image shift copying | [image shift copying in simplex mode in duplex mode Binding margin Binding margin Firstset original Image Shift

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 7. Image Shift (continued)

Advice In duplex copying of the 1-sided originals that already have a left binding margin, shift the image ofthe back pages by setting the desired shift amount plus the original margin, to create the same margin as that of the front pages. Gently close the RADF. Touch the “SCAN” key on the Basic screen. Repeat the steps 1. to 4, Having Problems? The memory may be fully loaded to cause overflow during scanning. See p. 12-4 to p. 12-5. Supplement: Checking copying conditions/printed copies 1 Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details.

Press the START PRINT button. The scanned data will ds Der be printed in succession. To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. 21[3] Scanned data in the memory will be cleared. 5] [6] After completion of copying, all the data in the memory B] [9] will be cleared. p] a CERN Si NT JAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick pap HP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13") Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R)

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 7. Image Shift (continued)

JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray In the case ofthe copier without a finisher, the exit tray capacity is 100 sheets. Be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray while copying before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Image shift mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch the reversed “Image Shift” key, then touch “OK” key. + To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. + _ To reset copying conditions to the initial condition, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 8. Non Image Area Erase

8. Non Image Area Erase

The Non image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals, such as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, etc. from the platen glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of the original will not be copied. General copying Non-Image Area Erase Set original Basic rules for Non image area erase *_ Place the original on the platen glass, not in the RADF. + Keep the RADF open throughout the procedure.

• Only 11 copying mode is available. (When using the P laten store mode, 1B 2 copying mode is also available.) + Original size is 10 mm x 10 mm minimum. Advice An original with dark coloured background may notallow Non image area erase copying to operate. Having Problems? Non image area erase may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your Service Centre about an appropriate place for installation. + The Non image area erase has two modes; namely, Oblique erase mode and Rectangular erase mode. The copieris initially setto Rectangular mode. Contact your Service Centre if you find the Rectangular erase mode is not suitable for you originals and ask for Oblique erase mode to be selected. Oblique erase mode Rectangular erase mode

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 8. Non Image Area Erase (continued)

Non image area erase Specifications Original paper size : A3 to 10 mm x 10 mm Tray paper size : A3,B4, A4R, A4,B5R,B5, A5RX, 8.5"X11"R (80g/m? paper recommended) Print quantity : 999 sheets max. Advice

• A5 is available in horizontal feed ( [1 ) only. Incompatible If any of the following copying conditions are going to be set, the Non image area erase may be cancelled or the key concerned on the screen may become faint, not allowing setting. Using RADF Sheet/Cover insertion 2»2 Chapter 2»1 Combination E-sort Booklet Staple-sort Image insertion APS Mixed original AMS Reverse image Rotation Image shift Procedure Set Copying Conditions 1 Close the RADF securely and press the AUTO RESET button.

2. Press the APPLICATION button on the Operation panel. The Application Selection

screen will be displayed.

3. Touch “Non image area erase” key on the Application Selection screen. The “Non

image area erase” key will be reversed, and the incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity. Application Selection screen ation Function IMAGE EDIT Piper. [ire] Advice To void the selection, touch “CANCEL"” key. The Basic screen will be restored. HA

4. As required, setthe other copying conditions. When using Store mode, touch “Store

Mode” key on the Application Selection screen. Advice To clear all the application settings, touch “ALL CLEAR” key. The Basic screen will be restored.

5. Touch “OK”key onthe Application Selection screen. The Basic screen will be restored.

Section 9 : Special Copying: Copy Image 8. Non Image Area Erase (continued)

Enter Print Quantity Press the Ten keys to set the desired print quantity. To change the entered quantity, press the CLEAR QTY. button and enter the correct quantity. Please Be Reminded! DO NOT press the STOP/CLEAR button when changing the print quantity. Stored image will be cleared. Do not press the AUTO RESET button as this will clear all the copier settings. Operation panel Basic screen DATA ERROR O0 © # FRET CT ÉCE Place Original(s) on the platen glass FACE DOWN 1 Open the RADF

Having Problems? Non image area erase may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your Service Centre about an appropriate place for installation. Supplement 1: Using Platen store mode To use Platen store mode, see p. 7-2 to 7-10 for details. Supplement 2: Checking copying conditions/printed copies 1 Press the CHECK button to display the Check screen.

2. Check the current copying conditions on the Check screen.

3. Touch “PROOF COPY” key on the Check screen to make a proof copy.

When completed, touch “EXIT” key to return to the Basic screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27 for details.

8. Non Image Area Erase (continued)

Press the START PRINT button. When using Platen store mode, press the START PRINT button to start the output job. To stop copying, press the STOP/CLEAR button. Scanned data in the memory will be cleared. After completion of copying, all the data in the memory will be cleared. A CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher ERROK © POWER SAVER ON OFF e][3] 31H B][9] den SH Înr The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. When copying mixed size originals, the capacity will be less than the following Non-sort mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/ 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP films, etc.) Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) Sort/Group mode Tray 2/3:500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13 Staple-sort mode 500 sheets max. (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"X11"R) 300 sheets max. (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) ZA CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to ja After completion of copying, cancel the selected application function. To release Non image area erase mode, display the Application Selection screen, touch the reversed “Non image area erase” key, then touch “OK” key. To release all the application functions, display the Application Selection screen and touch “ALL CLEAR” key. To reset copying conditions to the initial condition, press the AUTO RESET button on the Operation panel.

3. Output Mode for Machine without Finisher

The FS-105 finisher can be used in any of the following five modes in combination with the RADF. ( Non-Sort : Use Finisher upper exittray (TRAY 1), middle exittray (TRAY 2), or lower exit tray (TRAY 3). Copies are normally discharged into the specified exit tray. © Sort : Use Finisher middle exit tray (TRAY 2) or lower exit tray (TRAY 3). Automatically copies the original set and delivers the complete sets to the specified exit tray, offset and stacked. @ Staple-Sort : Use Finisher middle exit tray (TRAY 2) or lower exit tray (TRAY 3). Copies are automatically sorted and stapled. @ Group : Use Finisher middle exit tray (TRAY 2) or lower exit tray (TRAY 3). Group together multiple copies of each original and offset the sets upon exit. @) Face Up Trayl : Use Finisher upper exit tray (TRAY 1).

Copies exitto the upper tray in the reverse order, with simplex sheets and odd numbered duplex sheets face up. . Release lever Finisher upper exit tray — Finisher middle exit tray —" Finisher lower exit tray Advice: Paper Exit Switching Function of Finisher Exit Tray When the amount of copies delivered onto the Finisher exit tray (upper, middle or lower) exceeds its limit described below, the copier automatically shifts the output to another tray to complete the output job. Finisher upper exit tray: After 100 sheets (irrespective of the paper size) delivery, the output shifts to the middle, then lower tray. Finisher middle exit tray: After 300 sheets (A3, B4 or F4/8.5"x13")/500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"X1IR or 8.5"x11") delivery, the output shifts to the lower tray. Finisher lower exit tray: After 300 sheets (A3, B4 or F4/8.5"x13")/500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"X1IR or 8.5"x11") delivery, the output shifts to the middle tray.

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

Advice When the Finisher is disconnected from the copier before printing, the message “Please connect finisher to the copier” will be displayed, and if it happens to be disconnected in the middle of printing, the J am Position screen will be displayed. Be sure to lock the Finisher securely to the copier to avoid the above cases. Non-Sort Mode The Non-sort mode simply means thatthe offset-stacker finisher modes are not selected. Copies will be stacked on the Finisher upper/middle/lower tray without being offset by sets. Advice Usually the Non-Sort mode is factory-set as the initial state. The initial state can be changed to the Sort, Group, or Staple-sort by Key Operator mode. See p. 11-13 to p. 11-14. I 2 Non-Sort Mode Specifications Exit tray : Upper (TRAY1), Middle (TRAY 2), Lower (TRAY 3) exittray Paper size : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*,8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" Paper capacity : Upper exittray 100 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4,B5, B5R, A5SR*, 8.5"X11"R, 8.5"x11") 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP transparency film, etc.) Middle/Lower exit tray 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5, B5R, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11") 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R*) Advice *: A5 size paper is available in horizontal feed ( [2] ) only.

Section 10 : Output Mode 2. Inserting a New Staple Cartridge (continued)

Operation panel Output Mode screen CT on Me D SAT

Procedure L Press the OUTPUT button on the operation panel to display the Output Mode screen

3. Touch “OK” to complete setting and return to the Basic screen.

4. Select additional copying features, as desired.

5. Enter the desired print quantity.

6. Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

When using RADF store mode, position originals FACE UP in the RADF and touch “SCAN'on the Basic screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be stored in memory. When using P laten store mode, position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass and touch “SCAN” on the Basic screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be stored in memory.

7. Press the START PRINT button to begin copying in Non-sort mode.

Copies will exit face down, with the page heading toward the front of the copier. ÂA CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. Non-Sort Mode Tray 1: 100 sheets/10 sheets (thin/thick paper, transparency film, etc.) Tray 2/3 : 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x1l"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) VAN CAUTION: Finisher Operation DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving portions or into the grooves of the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be injured. To avoid injury when the Finisher middle exit tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT your hand into the two portions of the closing area.

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

Sort Mode The Sort mode is available when the offset-stacker Finisher is installed. Use this mode when you want to output multiple copies of the original set, and have each set offset on the Finisher middle/lower exit tray. The staple mode can be selected with the Sort mode. Each copies set will offset in the stack tray. LE 30mm Sort Mode Specifications Using RADF (P laten glass is available when used in combination with P late store mode.) Exit tray : Middle (TRAY 2), Lower (TRAY 3) exit tray Paper size : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*,8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" Paper capacity : Paper cannot be discharged on upper exit tray. Middle/Lower exit tray 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5, B5R, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11") 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R*) Advice *: A5 size paper is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Incompatible Using P laten glass (available when used in combination with Image insert, Dual page, or Platen store mode) Group Image quality (Very high) OHP interleave Finisher

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

Output Mode screen Operation panel ra

Procedure L Press the OUTPUT button on the operation panel to display the Output Mode screen

3. Touch ‘TRAY 2” or ‘TRAY 3”.

Advice Do not touch ‘TRAY 1”to select the Sort mode. Touch “OK” to complete setting and return to the Basic screen. Select additional copying features, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF. When using RADF store mode, position originals FACE UP in the RADF and touch “SCAN'on the Basic screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be stored in memory. When using P laten store mode, position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass and touch “SCAN” on the Basic screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be stored in memory.

8. Press the START PRINT button to begin copying in Sort mode.

one ÂA CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. Sort Mode Tray 2/3 : 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x1l"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) ÂA CAUTION: Finisher Operation DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving Portions or into the grooves of the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be injured. To avoid injury when the Finisher middle exit tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT your hand into the two portions of the closing area.

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

Group Mode The Group mode is available when the offset-stacker finisher is installed. Use this mode when you want to group together multiple copies of each original, and offset the sets on the Finisher middle/lower exit tray. Grouped sets cannot be stapled.

LE 30mm Group Mode Specifications Exit tray : Middle (TRAY 2), Lower (TRAY 3) exit tray Paper size : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*,8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" Paper capacity : Paper cannot be discharged on upper exit tray. Middle/Lower exit tray 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5, B5R, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11") 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R*) Advice *: A5 size paper is available in horizontal feed (1) only. Meompeñle OHP interleave Staple-sort, Ra sert Proof copy Sheet/C over insertion Auto layout Chapter Thin/Thick paper Booklet Non-image area erase Finisher

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

Output Mode screen Operation panel DUTPUT Procedure L Press the OUTPUT button on the operation panel to display the Output Mode screen

3. Touch ‘TRAY 2” or ‘TRAY 3”.

Advice Do not touch ‘TRAY 1’to select the Group mode. Touch “OK” to complete setting and return to the Basic screen. Select additional copying features, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the platen glass. When using RADF store mode, position originals FACE UP in the RADF and touch “SCAN'on the Basic screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be stored in memory. When using P laten store mode, position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass and touch “SCAN” on the Basic screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be stored in memory.

8. Press the START PRINT button to begin copying in Group mode.

one ÂA CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exittray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. Group Mode Tray 2/3 : 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x1l"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) VAN CAUTION: Finisher Operation DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving portions or into the grooves of the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be injured. To avoid injury when the Finisher middle exit tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT your hand into the two portions of the closing area.

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

Staple-Sort Mode The Staple-sort mode is available when the offset-stacker finisher is installed. Use this mode when you want to offset and staple each copied set. Each finished set will be offset on the Finisher middle/lower tray from the next copied set. Advice If Rotation activates, the stapling position rotates by 90°. AMIE 1 oblique staple 1 parallel staple 2 parallel staples

Staple-Sort Mode Specifications Using RADF (P laten glass is available when used in combination with P late store mode.) Exit tray : Middle (TRAY 2), Lower (TRAY 3) exit tray Paper size : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*,8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" Paper capacity : Paper cannot be discharged on upper exit tray. Middle/Lower exit tray 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5, B5R, 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11") 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5SR*) Staple capacity : 50 sheets (80g/m?) or 5.0mm thick or less (Staple capacity is changeable, and may be setto 45, 40, or 35 by service.) 20 sheets (90g/m?) in thick paper mode (Staple capacity is changeable, and may be setto 25,15, or 10 by service.) Staple location : 1 parallel staple A4R, B5R, A5R 1 oblique staple A3, B4, A4, B5 2 parallel staples A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5 Advice *: B5R, A5 size paper is available in horizontal feed ([]) and 1 parallel staple only. Incompatible Using P laten glass (available when used in combination with Image insert, Dual page, or Platen store mode) Group Repeat Booklet Auto layout Image quality (Very high) Thick mode in Thin/Thick paper OHP interleave Non-image area erase APS mode in Mixed original

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

Operation panel Output Mode screen Staple Location Selection screen DUTFUT Konica e ( Konica , Konica EN == Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica Konica

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

Procedure nn PR NH Son BR Press the OUTPUT button on the operation panel to display the Output Mode screen Touch “STAPLE SET”. The Staple Location Selection screen will be displayed. Touchthe desired key among the eightkeys on the Staple Location Selection screen to select the staple location. See the previous page for reference. Touch “OK” on the Staple Location Selection screen to return to the Output Mode screen. The “STAPLE” and “SORT” keys are highlighted. Touch ‘TRAY 2” or ‘TRAY 3”. Advice Do not touch ‘TRAY 1”to select the Staple-sort mode. Touch “OK”on the Output Mode screen to complete setting and return to the Basic screen. Select additional copying features, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity. Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF. 50 originals can be set. When using P laten store mode, position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass and touch "SCAN" on the Basic screen to scan. Advice Do not scan more than 51 images. Press the START PRINT button to begin copying in Staple-sort mode. VAN CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. Staple-Sort Mode Tray 2/3 : 500 sheets (A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x1l"R) 300 sheets (A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A5R) VAN CAUTION: Finisher Operation DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving portions or into the grooves of the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be injured. To avoid injury when the Finisher middle exit tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT your hand into the two portions of the closing area.

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

Face Up Mode In the normal exit mode, i.e., without Face Up mode selected, copies exit to the exit tray in the same order as the originals. In the simplex mode, for example, every sheet exits face down, and in the duplex mode, odd numbered sides exitface down. When the speedier Face Up mode is selected, copies exit to the upper tray of the Finisher in the reverse order, with simplex sheets and odd numbered duplex sheets face up. Face Up Mode Specifications Exit tray : Upper (TRAY1) exit tray only Paper size : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*,8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" Paper capacity : Upper exit tray 100 sheets (A3, B4,F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5, B5R, A5R*, 8.5"X11"R, 8.5"x11") 10 sheets (thin/thick paper, OHP transparency film, etc.) Advice *: A5 size paper is available in horizontal feed ( [2] ) only. Incompatible Sort Staple-sort Advice + When using platen glass in simplex copying, place the originals in reverse order to get effective results. + Using Multi-sheet bypass tray automatically sets the copier to be in Face up mode. If you desire to release this setting, contact your Service Centre. Output Mode screen Operation panel x [| AUTO ROTATION]

Procedure L Press the OUTPUT button to display the Output Mode screen.

2. Touch ‘TRAY1" and ‘FaceUP TRAY 1”.

In this case, the copied sets will be sorted automatically. Touch “GROUP”to output in Group mode. Touch “OK” to complete setting and return to the Basic screen. Select additional copying features, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity. npPwS

Section 10 : Output Mode 1. Finisher Specifications (continued)

6. Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

When using RADF store mode, position originals FACE UP in the RADF and touch “SCAN'on the Basic screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be stored in memory. When using P laten store mode, position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass and touch “SCAN” on the Basic screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be stored in memory.

7. Press the START PRINT button to begin copying in Group mode.

ÂA CAUTION: Paper Capacity of the Finisher The capacity ofthe Finisher exit tray is listed below. When the total number of copies in the copy run exceeds the stated capacity, be sure to unload the exit tray whilst the copier is still copying. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. The following capacity is for 80g/m? paper. Face Up + Non-Sort Mode Tray 1 : 100 sheets/10 sheets (thin/thick paper, transparency film, etc.) Face Up + Group Mode Tray 1 : 100 sheets/10 sheets (thin/thick paper, transparency film, etc.) VAN CAUTION: Finisher Operation DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving portions or into the grooves of the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be injured. To avoid injury when the Finisher middle exit tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT your hand into the two portions of the closing area. Finisher “e]

When the staple cartridge ofthe Finisher is empty, the following messages will be displayed on the touch screen. Please separate Finisher from the copier and replace staples Follow the procedure below to supply new staples. Procedure L While pressing the Finisher release lever, slide the Finisher to the left.

2. Push down the staple cartridge lever to release the

staple cartridge from the cartridge holder.

3. Remove the staple cartridge.

2. Inserting a New Staple Cartridge (continued)

5. Firmlyinsertthe new staple case into the staple cartridge

by aligning the arrow sides of both case and cartridge.

6. Remove the holder tape holding staples in place.

7. Insertthe staple cartridge and push in it securely.

8. Slide the Finisher to the right and connect securely the

Finisher with the main body. "e] Finisher

3. Output Mode for Machine without Finisher

3. Output Mode for Machine without Finisher

This section describes five output modes for a copier withoutthe Finisher. For the copier with Finisher installed, refer to p. 10-2 - p. 10-13. Sort with Normal exit (default) Group with Normal exit Sort with E-sort exit Group with E-sort exit Face up exit Normal Exit Sort with normal exit (default) Example: 3 set copie

Group with normal exit Example: 3 set copie Originals E-Sort Exit Sort with E-sort exit Group with E-sort exit Example: Example: 3 set copies 3 set copies <> l Originals TL

3, Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued) Face Up Exit l Originals Sort with Group with Sort with Group with E-sort exit E-sort exit normal exit normal exit Example: 3 sets copies

Section 10 : Output Mode 3. Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)

Normal Exit When not requiring E-sort exit, select either Sort or Group mode with normal exit. Sortmode : The originals will be copied and output in the same order of pagination until the number of finished set reaches the set count (print quantity). Group mode : The first page of the originals will be copied and output until itreaches the set print quantity, then repeat it for each original in the same order of pagination. Output Mode screen Operation panel OUTPUT_ MODE

2. Touch “SORT” or “GROUP”, then “OK” to complete the setting and return to the

Basic screen. Advice The copier automatically stops to output when the number of copies delivered onto the exit tray reaches 100 during one output job. If you desire to release this function, contact your Service Centre. JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray The exittray capacity is 100 sheets. If a copy run of more than 100 is required, be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray before the maximum capacity is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam. LU"

E-Sort Exit This mode rotates every second finished set by 90° upon exit to the tray, only when A4/ B5 copy paperis loaded vertically (A4/B5) and horizontally (A4R/B5R) into separate trays. Sort with E-SortExit : The originals will be copied and output in the same order of pagination until the number of finished set reaches the set count (print quantity), with every second finished set being rotated by 90°. Group with E-SortExit : The first page ofthe originals will be copied and output until itreaches the set print quantity, then repeatitfor each original in the same order of pagination, with every second finished set being rotated by 90°. E-Sort Exit Specifications Not available for the copier with Finisher Use RADF, or operate Store mode. Available only Group with E-sort exit when not using Platen store mode but setting originals onto the platen glass. Paper size : A4 and A4R/B5 and B5R paper should be loaded in any tray including Multi-sheet bypass tray. Incompatible | = APS Mixed original Image quality (Very high) Repeat Sheet/Cover insertion Auto layout Booklet Thin/Thick paper OHP interleave Non-Image area erase Output Mode screen Operation panel fut Node OUTPUT_ MODE FacelP AUTO ROTATION DUTFUT Output Mode on Ex Traÿ "e]

Section 10 : Output Mode 3. Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)

Procedure . Load A4 and A4R/B5 and B5R copy paper in any tray or Multi-sheet bypass tray. . Press the OUTPUT button to display the Output Mode Screen. , Touch "E-Sort”. . Touch “SORT” or “Group”. Touch “OK” to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen. , Select additional copying features, as desired. . Position originals FACE UP in the RADF. Up to 50 originals can be set. When using RADF store mode, position originals FACE UP in the RADF and touch “SCAN'on the Basic Screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be store in memory. When using P laten store mode, position originals FACE DOWN on the platen glass and touch “SCAN” on the Basic Screen to scan. Max. 1,500 images can be stored in memory. Advice Press CHECK button to view the selection, and make the P roof copy, if desired; then “EXIT”" to return to the Basic Screen. See p. 7-22 to p. 7-27.

8. Slide the exit tray longer.

9. Press the START PRINT button.

NOUNPBWNE Advice The copier automatically stops to output when the number of copies delivered onto the exit tray reaches 100 during one output job. If you desire to release this function, contact your Service Centre. JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray The exittray capacity is 100 sheets. If a copy run of more than 100 is requi be sure to remove the copies from the exit tray before the i is reached. Failure to do so will cause the copier to jam.

Face Up Exit The 7040 copier basically outputs copies facing down onto the exittray in simplex copying, and with the odd number pages facing down in duplex copying. The Face up exit operates to reverse the above output manner, that is, output copies facing up in simplex copying and with the odd number pages facing up in duplex copying. This output mode may reduce the troubles during the output, however, the copied set will be in reverse order of the originals. Using Multi-sheet bypass tray automatically sets the copier to be in Face up exit. If you desire to release this setting, contact your service representative. Advice When using platen glass in simplex copying, place the originals in reverse order to get effective results. Face Up Exit Specifications Face up exit can be selected together with Sort, Group, or E-sort exit. Paper size : A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R*,8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" Advice *: A5 size paper is available in horizontal feed ([J) only. Incompatible None Output Mode screen Operation panel

CANCEL. Procedure L Press the OUTPUT button to display the Output Mode screen.

2. Touch “FACE UP”, then “OK” to complete setting and return to the Basic Screen.

Advice The copier automatically stops to output when the number of copies delivered onto the exit tray reaches 100 during one output job. If you desire to release this function, contact your Service Centre. JAN CAUTION: Maximum Loading Capacity of the Exit Tray The exittray capacity is 100 sheets. If py run of more th be sure to re! il h is reached. F

12.Poner Save 13.Memory 5W 1.List Print (Panel contrast _|

2. System Initial [1]

Time [1] Language [2]

3. Copier Initial [2]

Copy Mode [1] Density [2] Magnification [3] Tray [4] Output [5] Image Quality [6]

5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4]

How to Access the EKC Setting Mode Change EKC Data [1] EKC Data List [2] All Counter Reset [3] EKC On/Off Setting [4] Copy Limit Reached Effect [5]

How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode Weekly Timer Setting [1] Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set[2] Machine Working Day Individual Set [3] Lunch Hour Off Function [4] Password Setting [5]

11. Touch Panel Adjustment [10]

The key operator is trained to handle all special key operator functions that are not accessible to the general user, such as monitoring overall copier activity, machine performance, and service information; modifying machine settings; and controlling user activity, for billing purposes. A unique 4-digit key operator password is normally set by service at installation. If the unique code is notsetby service, the copier will not display Key Operator Password Entry screen when the Key Operator mode is being accessed, and a key operator password will not be required. A service-set 8-digit EKC master key code must be entered by the key operator to access the Electronic Key Counter functions, and a service-set 4-digit Weekly timer master key code must be entered by the key operator to access the Weekly timer functions. To ensure the security of Key O perator mode, itis recommended that you establish à unique key operator password, along with the key operator EKC master key code and Weekly timer master key code, and keep them in a confidential file. Advice When remote diagnostics is not activated, “15. KRDS host” key will be dimmed on the Key Operator Mode screen and cannot be selected.

How to Access the Key Operator Mode Key Operator Password Entry screen

Procedure L First, be sure the copier power switch is OFF.

2. Then, turn power back ON while pressing the HELP button.

The Key Operator Password Entry screen displays when the 4-digit key operator password is set by service. Otherwise, the Key Operator Mode screen displays without the password requirement.

3. Ifthe Key Operator Password Entry screen is displayed, use the keypad on the

touch screen to enter your 4-digit key operator password; then touch “OK”, to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. If the key operator password is not valid, check with your Service Centre.

5. Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode screen, as described on the

1. System Initial 1. Time: [Current time; Set time]

2. Language: [English]

2. Copier Initial 1. Copy mode: [RADF; 1-1; 1-2; 2-1; 2-2]

2. Density: [AE; manual]

3. Magnification: [AMS; 1.00; ratio 0.25-4.00]

4, Tray: [APS; Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass tray]

5. Output: [Tray1,Tray2,Tray 3, Sort, Group, Staple, Face

up tray 1, Staple location] (machine with Finisher) [Alternate, Sort, Group, Face up] (machine without Finisher)

6. Resolution: [Normal, High, Very High]

3. Preset key 1. Density: [Userset 1, Userset 2 (darker 16 levels, lighter 16

2. Magnification: [Userset 1; Userset 2; Userset 3 (ratio

3. All count reset [Yes; No]

4. EKC on/off setting [on:; off]

5. Copy limit reached effect [Immediately; After job; Warning]

5.J ob memory [ ob lock; Delete]

6. Paper type [Color; Recycle; Letterhead; OHP ; Label; Invoice; Legal; Blank]

7. Panel contrast [Contrast Dark/Normal/Light; Backlight Dark/Normal/Light]

8. Key op. data [Name; For assistance]

9. Weekly timer 1. Weekly timer setting

2. Weekly timer copier on/off time set

3. Machine working day individual set

4, Lunch hour off function

Auto shut off timer: [30, 60, 90, 120, 240] Auto shut off: [on; off]

AUTO/RESET effect Load RADF effect Non image area erase RADF frame erasure Auto tray switch Platen APS RADF APS ATS/APS (bypass) ATS/APS (tray 1) ATS/APS (tray 2) ATS/APS (tray 3) ATS/APS (tray 4) Platen AMS RADF AMS Staple mode reset Key click sound Job memory recall Sheet insertion A5 original type Rotation 1 shotindication Booklet Fold original

2. System Initial [1]

Setthe following initial conditions of the copier. + _ Time: Current date and time, summer time *_ Language: Language used in LCD ( English) Time [1] Setthe current date and time, and also the summer time. © Default setting: Summer time off Procedure Key Operator Mode screen ten/cooier settiné mer System Initial Setting Menu screen Time Setting screen Initial e 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat 2 Laréuage CURRENT TIVE: 12/08/1908 14:39 HET TIME: 15/08/1958 14:30

Lock Job menory A10.Tauch panel adi SUMER TE, 1 While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

The time that the copier currently has is displayed in the upper line, in the order of date, month, year, and time (in 24-hour expression). (1) Touch the left arrow (<<) and right arrow (>>) keys displayed under the “SET TIME” to move the cursor to the number to be changed. (2) Press the keypads on the operation panel to enter the number.

4. To activate the summer time function, touch “SUMMER TIME” to highlight it.

Advice This operation advances the current time of the copier by an hour. If any other time is required to be set, contact your Service Centre.

5. Touch “OK” to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu

6. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.

7. Ifothersysteminitial setting changes are required, touch desired key from [1]to [21].

8. If no other system initial settings are required, touch “RETURN” to restore the Key

0. Turn the machine power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 2. System Initial [1] (continued)

Language [2] Select the language used in the LCD (English). © Default setting: English Key Operator Mode screen ten/cooier settiné mer System Initial Setting Menu screen Language Selection screen System Initial Initial settins neut Svsten 1Systen Initial Copier Initial” H/.Farel contrast Éuiey 0. Data Gheckly tirer “Lock bb menory ff0.teucn panel adi Porcedure 1 While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. Touch “1. System Initial” to display the System Initial Setting Menu screen, then touch “2. Language” to display the Language Selection screen. Touch “ENGLISH”. Touch “OK” to complete the setting and return the System Initial Setting Menu screen. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8. Ifothersysteminitial setting changes are required, touch desired key from [1]to [2]. If no other system initial settings are required, touch “RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the machine power switch back ON to perform copying operations. LD How RW ND

3. Copier Initial [2]

Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered on, when Auto/Reset timer is operated, or when AUTO RESET button is pressed. These settings can be changed by the key operator, as shown in this section. Initially, i.e., at installation, the Basic Screen displays the following condition: Initial Setting Copy Mode :1-1 Copy Density : AE Lens Mode :1:1 Paper Tray :APS Finisher : ON When Initial settings are changed by the key operator, the new initial settings display when the copier is powered on, when Auto/Resettimeris reached, or when AUTO RESET button is pressed. The following initial settings can be changed by the key operator: Copy mode : [RADF; 1-1; 1-2; 2-2; 2-1] Copy density : [AE; manual] Lens mode : [AMS; 1.00; ratio 0.25-4.00] Paper tray : LAPS; trays 1, 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass tray] Output : [Tray 1, 2, 3, Sort, Group, Staple, Face up tray 1, Staple location] (machine with Finisher) [E-sort, Sort, Group, Face up] (machine without Finisher) AUTO RESET key: auto for full-auto; Initial setting] Setting procedures are described on the following pages. The Full-Automatic Mode screen described on pages 4-4 & 6-5 can be made to display initially through the Key Operator mode, i.e., instead of Basic Screen. All Full-Automatic Mode settings shown in the example below can be changed by the key operator in the Initial Settings menu. Print Quantity cannot be changed. Copy Mode :1-1 Copy Density : AE Lens Mode :1:1 Paper Tray : APS Advice The mostcommonly-used settings are established atinstallation. Before changing any of the copier settings, be sure that you understand the overall and long term effect of the change.

3. Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Copy Mode [1] Set Copy mode to occur after power on or after Auto/Reset occurs. © Setting options: RADF; 1-1; 1-2; 2-2; 2-1 © Default setting: RADF on, 1-1 Key Operator Mode screen ten/cc settiné men 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat AE KG. (Pheckly tirer Lock Job menory A10.Tauch panel adi [Æ] Copier Initial Setting Menu screen Copy Mode Initial Setting screen Initial sett nenu Copier Initiali ORIGINAL Hénifieztion

Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice IF an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

2. Touch “2. Copier Initial” to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu screen, then

touch “L. Copy mode” to display the Copy Mode Initial Setting screen.

3. Touch the setting you want for the initial condition of the copier.

If 2-2 or 2-1 mode is selected, RADF will also be selected, automatically. In this case, the RADF must be in a closed position when power is turned ON, or when Auto/Reset is functioning. Otherwise, the message ‘Please close RADF” will be displayed. Touch “OK” to complete setting and return the Copier Initial Setting Menu screen. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8. If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch desired key from [116]. If no other copier initial settings are required, touch “RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. po non

3. Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Density [2] Set Copy density to be effective after power on or after Auto/Reset occurs. © Setting options: AE; manual © Default setting: AE on Key Operator Mode screen fe tiné menu 1Systen Initial Copier Initial H7.Parel contrast AFKO. Fey timer Copier Initial Setting Menu screen Copy Density Initial S etting screen Initial sett menu F.Inage quality <Ménification er Init

Procedure 1 While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. Touch “2. Copier Initial” to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu screen. Touch “2. Density” to display the Copy Density Initial Setting screen. Touch “AE” to select AE mode, or touch the density level required. Nine exposure levels are displayed. Touch “OK” to complete setting and return the Copier Initial Setting Menu screen. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9. If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch desired key from [116]. If no other copier initial settings are required, touch “RETURN” to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. SL œumm Run

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 3. Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Magnification [3] Setthe magnification ratio you initially want to display after the user turns the power on or after Auto/Reset restores the Initial settings. Advice This setting should not conflict with the Initial setting for Paper Tray. For example, if APS is selected for the initial paper tray setting, a ratio setting other than AMS will be ignored. © Setting options: AMS; 1.00; ratio 0.25-4.00 Copier Initial Setting Menu screen Magnification Initial Setting screen Initial sett menu Key Operator Mode screen cceier setting menu 1Systen Initial Copier Initial H7.Parel contrast F.Inage quality AFkC. F.hedely tirer BLock bb nenory fÜ0.Ivucn panel ai [Æ] Haénification Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

4. Select the desired setting from the Magnification Initial Setting screen:

To select 1.00 if it is not already displayed, touch “L.00”. To select another ratio, touch upper/lower arrow key to display the desired ratio, or enter a 3-digit ratio using the keypad on the operation panel. To select AMS, touch “AMS”.

5. Touch “OK” to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu

6. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.

7. Ifother copier initial setting changes are required, touch desired key from [1]-{6].

8. If no other copier initial settings are required, touch “RETURN to restore the Key

Operator Mode screen.

10. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 3. Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Tray [4] Set paper tray priority to be in effect after power is turned on or after Auto/Reset occurs. This function sets tray priority, not paper size priority. Therefore, if paper size is changed in the tray, the tray will still remain the priority tray. The initial paper tray setting should not conflict with the initial setting for Lens Mode. For example, ifthe initial paper tray setting is APS, the initial setting for paper tray priority will be ignored. © Setting options: APS; trays 1, 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass tray © Default setting: APS on, no specified tray Copier Initial Setting Menu screen Tray Initial Setting screen Copier Init Key Initial se menu [Æ] F.Inage quality Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

4. Touch “APS”, or touch any tray key to select a specific tray.

5. Touch “OK” to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu

6. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.

7. Ifother copier initial setting changes are required, touch desired key from [1]-{6].

8. If no other copier initial settings are required, touch “RETURN to restore the Key

10. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

al [2] (continued) Output [5] Setinitial Output mode of the Finisher or exit tray to be effective after power is turned on or after Auto/Reset occurs. Machine with Finisher [1 Setting options: EXIT Tray 1/Tray 2/Tray 3, OUTPUT MODE Non-sort/s ort/Group/Staple/ Face up tray 1; (AUTO ROTATION onoff) © Default setting: EXIT Tray 2; OUTPUT MODE Sort; (AUTO ROTATION on) Machine without Finisher © Setting options: E-sort on/off, OUTPUT MODE Sort/Group/F ace up; (AUTO ROTATION on/off) © Default setting: E-sort off, OUTPUT MODE Sort Copier Initial Setting Menu screen Initial settiné coey menu Key Operator Mode screen sten/caier setting menu 1Systen Initial Copier Initial H7.Parel contrast F.Inage quality AFKO. Fey timer . Lock Job menory A10.Tauch panel adi RETURN Output Mode Initial Setting screen Output Mode Initial Setting screen {machine with Finisher) Staple Location Initial Setting screen (machine without Finisher) teut ee ar

AUTO ROTATION] SRT Output Mode Initial Setting screen Copier Initial Setting Menu screen canceled Auto rotation function by canceled Auto rotation function by the Key operator mode the Key operator mode {machine with Finisher) Staple Location Initial Seting screen {machine without Finisher)

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 3. Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. . Touch "2. Copier Initial” to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu screen. , Touch ‘5. Output” to display the Output Mode Initial Setting screen . . Forthe machine with Finisher, perform the following operation and proceed to step

BwN To select the exit tray, touch ‘TRAY 1”, ‘TRAY 2”, or ‘TRAY 3”. Advice IF'TRAY1'is selected, “SORT”, “GROUP” and “STAPLE” are automatically dimmed. If “TRAY2" or ‘TRAY3"is selected, “Face UP TRAY l’is automatically dimmed. Toselectthe Outputmode, touch “SORT”, “GROUP”, “STAPLE"”, or “Face UP TRAY1”. Advice

1. IF'STAPLE"is selcted, “SORT” is automatically highlighted.

2. Ifselecting Non-sort mode, do nothighlight any ofthe “SORT”, “GROUP”, “STAPLE”,

and “Face UP TRAY 1”. Toselectthe desired staple location, touch "STAPLE SET”. Touchthe desired location on the Staple Location Initial Setting screen, and touch “OK”. When the Output Mode Initial Setting screen is displayed, you can select ON/OFF ofthe Auto rotation initial setting. To release the Auto rotation mode, touch “AUTO” not to highlight it.

5. For the machine without Finisher, perform the following operation and proceed to

step 6. To use the E-sort exit, touch “E-Sort”. To select the Output mode, touch “SORT”, “GROUP”, or “Face UP”. When the Output Mode Initial Setting screen is displayed, you can select ON/OFF ofthe Auto rotation initial setting. To release the Auto rotation mode, touch “AUTO” not to highlight it. Touch “OK”on the Output Mode Initial S etting screen to complete setting and return the Copier Initial Setting Menu screen. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 10. If other initial setting changes are required, touch desired key from [1]-16]. Ifno otherinitial settings are required, touch “RETURN” restore the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. PS pos ©

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 3. Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Image Quality [6] Set one of the three Image quality modes after power is turned on or after Auto/Reset

Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice IF an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

2. Touch “2. Copier Initial” to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu screen.

3. Touch “6. Image quality” to display the Image Quality Initial Setting screen.

4. Touch “NORMAL”, “HIGH”, or ‘VERY HIGH”.

5. Touch “OK” to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu

6. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.

7. Ifotherinitial setting changes are required, touch desired key from [1]-{61.

8. Ifno otherinitial settings are required, touch “RETURN”to restore the Key Operator

10. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Set two USERSETS of copy density and three Presets of magnification. Density [1] Output copying samples from 16 density levels from LIGHTER to NORMAL or NORMAL to DARKER, then select the desired exposure and program it as USERSET 1 or 2. The programmed copy density can be recalled by touching USERSETIorUSERSET20on the Density Selection screen. Key Operator Mode screen settiné men Preset Key Setting Menu screen Userset Density Selection screen r ey setting ment 1Systen Initial Copier Initial H/.Farel contrast USERSETT LSERET2 Heakls timer Lock Job nencry JO. Touch panel ad UsersetDensity Darker Setting screen UsersetDensity Lighter Setting screen Roi 12 4 Lu LE 4

ve Ed un 2 il J SOU E EE GOUE EE FT DONNE EL "Je ONE EE ur LUE ie 5 0 O0 ES Lighter CANCEL tk Darker CANCEL LS Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. Touch “3. Preset key” to display the Preset Key Setting Menu screen. Touch “1. Density” to display the Userset Density Selection screen. Place the original on the platen glass. Touch “USERSET1" or “USERSET2”. The Userset Density Darker Setting screen will be displayed. To program USERSET (1 or 2) to a darker level, perform the following operation, then proceed to step 8. (1) Touch “No.1 1-4”, “No.2 5-8”, “No.3 9-12”, or “No.4 13-16”, then press START PRINT button. The darker level sample sheet will be output. (2) Selectthe desired darker density from the sample sheet(s), then touch a density key No. (“L” to “16”). nn mRwN LT"

To program USERSET (1 or 2) to a lighter level, perform the following operation, then proceed to step 8. (1) Touch Lighter to display the Userset Density Lighter Setting screen. (2) Touch “No.1 1-4”, “No.2 5-8”, “No.3 9-12”, or “No.4 13-16”, then press START PRINT button. The lighter level sample sheet will be output. (3) Selectthe desired lighter density from the sample sheet(s), then touch a density key No. (“L” to “16”). . Touch “OK”to complete settings and return to the UsersetDensity Selection screen. If setting another “USERSET”, repeat steps 5 to 8. Touch “RETURN on the Userset Density Selection screen to return to the Preset Key Setting Menu screen. . lfno further changes are required, proceed to step 14. . lfother preset key setting changes are required, touch desired key, from [11-42]. If no other preset key settings are required, touch “RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. F7] Key Operator Mode

Magnification [2] PRESET and USERSET ratios are used to reduce and enlarge the original image to accommodate copy paper size, and are available when Lens Mode is selected from the Basic Screen. These ratios may be changed by the key operator as shown below. © Setting options: User Set or Preset ratio © Default setting: USERSET1: 4.00 USERSET2: 2.00 USERSET3: 0.50 Key Operator Mode screen *tiné menu Preset Key Setting Menu screen Userset Magnification Setting screen ey settiné ment on

3. Touch “2. Magnification” to display the Userset Magnification Setting screen.

4. Touch “USERSET” you wantto change, then enter a ratio from 0.25-4.00, using the

keypad. If a ratio under 0.25 is entered, 0.25 will be displayed. If a ratio over 4.00 is entered, 4.00 will be displayed.

5. Touch “OK” to complete the setting and return to the Preset Key Setting Menu

6. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.

7. Ifother preset key setting changes are required, touch desired key, from [1]-421.

8. If no other preset key settings are required, touch “RETURN” to restore the Key

Operator Mode screen.

10. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4]

This function can only be accessed by the key operator after an 8-digit EKC master key code is entered. The Electronic Key Counter allows you to monitor all copying activity by controlling EKC password accounts. This feature can track copier usage for individual users and/or accounts as well as limit access to the copier to authorized users. Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can also be set. Use the EKC Key Operator Form provided atthe end of this section to record EKC password information. The EKC stores up to 256 EKC passwords, each of which represents a separate account that can be used for billing and recordkeeping. The number of users assigned to each EKC password may depend upon the billing system in operation and the number of individuals and departments using the copier. When the EKC is activated, copying can be performed only after a valid 5-digit EKC password is entered. Copy quantity for each password, copy limit for each password, and copy quantity for each paper size can be visually confirmed in print. IfEKC needs to be activated on your machine, contact your Service Centre. The following EKC settings can be made:

1. Change E.K.C. Data:

Create up to 256 individual EKC passwords, 00000-99999, and limit copy count for each password to a max. 999,999 copies.

2. E.K.C. Data List:

Display the copy count for each EKC password, and change limit settings.

3. All Counter Reset:

Clear the copy count for all passwords.

4. EKC On/Off Setting:

Select the function to be on or off. The initial setting is Off.

5. Copy Limit Reached Effect:

Setthe machine condition when the copy limit is reached. The machine can be set to either stop immediately after a job is completed or simply warn you that the copy limit is reached. Fe] Key Operator Mode

5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4] (continued)

How to Access the EKC Setting Mode Key Operator Mode screen ten/coe 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat AE KG. (Pheckly tirer EKC Master Key Code screen EKC Setting Menu screen settiné men EKE. master ettin men 1 Orange E.K.0. cata EN Gdata list EK-C. ln/Off settire Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, nm 8 wn then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. (See Advice 1.) If the key operator password is not valid, check with your Service Centre. Touch ‘4. E.K.C”. The EKC Master Key Code screen displays, if a code is required. Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch “OK” to display the EKC Setting Menu screen. (See Advice 2.) Select the desired EKC function, and make settings, as required. To exitthe EKC mode, touch “RETURN” on EKC Setting Menu screen. To exitthe Key Operator mode, turn the main power switch OFF. Advice 1 Ifan invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. 2 Ifaninvalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. The EKC master key code can be set to less than 8 digits by the Memory switch setting of the Key operator function.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4] (continued)

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4] (continued)

Touch “4. E.K.C. Enter” an 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch “OK”to display the EKC Setting Menu screen. Advice If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. . Touch “L. Change E.K.C.” data to display the EKC Data Input screen. . “ID No.” key will be highlighted, enabling you to immediately enter an ID No. Enter a 3-digit ID No. from 000-255 using the keypad on the operation panel. , Touch “Password”. ‘Password”key will be highlighted, enabling you to immediately enter an EKC password. Enter a 5-digit EKC password using the keypad on the operation panel. Advice

1. Do not enter “00000”. The initial EKC password value is “00000”.

2. We recommend that you make a list all EKC passwords and ID Nos.

, Touch Name to display the Name Input screen. If you do not specify the name, proceed to step 10. This operation can be completed normally without the name specified. . Input desired name according to the procedure below. (1) Max. 24 characters can be entered. (2) Touch # Upper arrow and # Lower arrow keys on the Name Input screen to input uppercase and lowercase letters and symbols. (3) Touch “DEL.” key to delete the input character from the last. (4) Touching “CANCEL"on the Name Inputscreen will clear allthe inputcharacters. (5) To change the existing name, touch “DEL.” key to delete it and enter the new name. , Touch “OK” on the Name Input screen to return to the EKC Data Input screen. , Touch “Limit”. “Limit” key will be highlighted, enabling you to immediately enter copy limit. Enter a 6-digit copy limit for the ID No. using the keypad on the operation panel. The input copy limit will be displayed on the right of the copy count. Advice

1. Ifan invalid copy limit is entered, continue by entering the valid 6-digit copy limit.

2. Entering “00000” signifies no copy limit.

3. The “CLEAR” key, thought clears copy count, does not function on the EKC Data

Input screen. Touch “OK” to complete settings and return to the EKC Setting Menu screen. When the same EKC password has been used for another ID No., the Password Duplication screen will be displayed. To re-enter new password, touch “YES” and return to the step 4. To create duplicate password, touch “NO”, then touch “OK”. Advice Itis possible to assign the same EKC password to different ID Nos. Note, however, that the number of copies will be counted only for the EKC password with the smallest ID No. Copy count for the other ID Nos. will notbe monitored. We recommend you do not use duplicate EKC password. . Ifno further changes are required, proceed to step 15. If other EKC setting changes are required, touch desired key from [11-45]. If no other EKC settings are required, touch “RETURN”to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. . Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. [T°

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4] (continued)

EKC Data List [2] Use this setting to display the list of copy count and copy limitfor each ID No., and to edit, add, and delete these EKC data. © Edit items: EKC password, Name, copy limit, copy count © Delete items: ID No., EKC password, Name, copy limit, copy count © Add items: ID No., EKC password, Name, copy limit Key Operator Mode screen EKC Data List screen enfcoier settin men EKC Setting Menu screen settiné men B5.Lock Job memory 54h CO0000/3335

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4] (continued)

Touch “4. E.K.C."Enter an 8-digitEKC master key code, then touch “OK”to display the EKC Setting Menu screen. Advice If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. Touch "2. E.K.C.” data list to display the EKC Data List screen. To delete the EKC data, operate the procedure below, proceed to step 8. (1) Touchthe A Upper arrow and Y Lower arrow keys on the rightin the EKC Data List screen to highlight the EKC data to be deleted. (2) Touch “DEL.”. The Delete Confirmation screen will be displayed. (3) Touch “Yes” to delete, or touch “No” to cancel. To addthe EKC data, touch “ADD”. The EKC Data Inputscreen with invalid "CLEAR" key will be displayed. To inputthe EKC data, see p. 11-22. Proceed to step 7. To editthe EKC data, touch the A Upper arrow and Y Lower arrow keys on the right in the EKC Data List screen to highlightthe EKC data to be edited, then touch “EDIT”. The EKC Data Edit screen will be displayed. After operating the procedure below, proceed to step 7. (1) To editthe EKC password, touch “Password”. Enter a new 5-digitEKC password using the keypad on the operation panel. Do not enter “00000”. (2) To editthe name, touch “Name”. The Name Input screen will be displayed. See p. 11-22. (3) To edit the copy limit, Touch “Limit”. Enter a new 6-digit copy limit using the keypad on the operation panel. Entering “00000” signifies no copy limit. (4) To clear the copy count, touch “CLEAR”. Touch “OK'"onthe EKC Data Inputscreen orthe EKC Data Editscreen to complete settings and return to the EKC Data List screen. To cancel the changes made in step 6 or 7, touch “RETURN" to restore the EKC Data List screen. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 11. If other EKC setting changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the EKC Setting Menu screen. Touch desired key from [1]-45]. If no other EKC settings are required, touch “RETURN”to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. . Turn power OFF. . Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4] (continued)

All Counter Reset [3] Reset the count for all EKC password Nos. © Setting options: Reset All Counters yes or no All Counter Reset screen Key Operator Mode screen ten/cooier settiné mer EKC Setting Menu screen settiné men 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat 1 Orange E.K.0. cata EN Gdata list Gheckly tirer Lock bb nencry JO. lcurn varel adi AE .K.C. (h/0if settine

Copy Linit Reached effect Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid key operator password is entered, coutinue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

2. Touch "4.E.K.C."Enter an 8-digitEKC master key code, then touch “OK”to display

the EKC Setting Menu screen. Advice If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. Touch “3. AIl counter reset” to display the All Counter Reset screen. Touch “Yes” to reset all counters to zero. Or, touch “No” not to reset. The selected key will be highlighted. Touch “OK” to complete settings and return to the EKC Setting Menu screen. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9. If other EKC setting changes are required, touch desired key from [11-45]. If no other EKC settings are required, touch “RETURN”to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. SL oupm Rw

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4] (continued)

EKC On/Off Setting [4] Use this function to turn EKC ON or OFF. Advice IFEKC OFF is selected while EKC functions, the copier will be enabled to perform copying job without an EKC password entered, and both copy count and copy limit functions will be discontinued. © Default setting: EKC on Key Operator Mode screen ten/ccoier settiné mer EKC Setting Menu screen EXD. settiné men EKC On/Off Settingscreen LÉvstem Initial L.Chanse EC. cata 2.Copier Initial EK.C.data list AFkC. F.hedely tirer BLock bb nenory fÜ0.Ivucn panel ai [Æ] AE KG. On/tf œttiné B Copy Limit Reached et fect Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid key operator password is entered, coutinue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

4. Touch “ON” to activate EKC or touch “OFF” to de-activate EKC.

The selected key will be highlighted.

5. Touch “OK” to complete settings and return to the EKC Setting Menu screen.

6. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.

7. Ifother EKC setting changes are required, touch desired key from [1]-45].

8. Ifno other EKC settings are required, touch “RETURN"to restore the Key Operator

10. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 5. EKC (Electronic Key Counter) [4] (continued)

Copy Limit Reached Effect [5] Use this function to select whether the copier will stop when the count limitis reached, or if the copier will complete the copy job before stopping when reaching maximum copy count. © Setting options: Immediately, After job, Warning © Default setting: After job Key Operator Mode screen ten. settiné men EKC Setting Menu screen tiné men Copy Limit Reached Effect screen

3. Touch “5. Copy Limit Reached effect” to display the Copy Limit Reached Effect

Touch “immediately” to stop the copier when the copy limit is reached. In this case, the paper in process will be completed, and Enter EKC password will display after the copier stops. Touch “After job” to stop the copier after the current job is completed, when copy limit is reached. Touch “Warning” to stop the copier but to display the copy limit reached.

5. Touch “OK” to complete settings and return to the EKC Setting Menu screen.

6. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.

7. Ifother EKC setting changes are required, touch desired key from [1]-45].

8. Ifno other EKC settings are required, touch “RETURN”to restore the Key Operator

10. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Use this function to lock/unlock or delete a J ob that has been programmed. A locked J ob is indicated by a lock icon on the job number of the J ob Selection screen. The settings of a locked job cannot be changed. © Setting options: Lock J ob memory; Unlock J ob memory; Delete J ob memory © Lock/delete is available for all 15 stored jobs © Job lock is available only for named jobs © A blank key indicates that no job is programmed O ****%*%* indicates that a job is programmed but unnamed Key Operator Mode screen Job Memory Lock/Delete screen 1 APE 8 ? IN J L Job Lock]]_ DEL. RETURN Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advoce If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

2. Touch “5. Lock] ob memory” to display the J ob Memory Lock/Delete screen.

3. To lock or unlock a job memory, operate the procedure below, then proceed to step

(1) Touch A Upper arrow or Y Lower arrow key on the right in the J ob Memory Lock/Delete screen to highlight the job to be locked/unlocked. (2) Touch ‘J ob Lock”. (3) The job to be locked will display the lock icon in the job number. The previously locked job will be unlocked and the lock icon will disappear.

4. To delete a job memory, operate the procedure below, then proceed to step 5.

(1) Touch A Upper arrow or Y Lower arrow key on the right in the J ob Memory Lock/Delete screen to highlight the job to be deleted. (2) Touch “DEL”. (3) Programs and name are deleted from the job memory.

5. Touch "RETURN" to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode

7. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Use this function to indicate a specific paper type in the Tray Selection screen and the lower message area on the Basic screen. This is especially useful when special paper is used on a regular basis and is always placed in a specific paper tray. © Setting options: See list below Key Operator Mode screen sten/copier settiné menu Paper Type Setting screen aper type 1Systen Initial Dtapier imitia AE KG. 1.Meekly timer

3. Select and touch desired paper tray.

4. Touch the A Upper arrow and Y Lower arrow keys to select paper type.

Touch the arrow keys until the desired name appears.

5. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 7.

6. If other key operator settings are required, touch “RETURN” to restore the Key

8. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Use this feature to adjust the contrast and backlight of the touch screen portion of the operation panel. © Setting options: Contrast dark; normal; light © Default settings: Contrast normal; Back light normal Panel Contrast screen Parel contrast Key Operator Mode screen sten/copier settiné menu 1Systen Initial Dtapier imitia CONTRAST AE KG. 1.Meekly timer TGHT B.Lock Job memory H10.Touch panel adi Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid key operator password is entered, coutinue by entering the valid 4-digit password. Touch ‘7. Panel contrast” to display the Panel Contrast screen. To adjust the contrast, touch “DARK”, “NORM, or “LIGHT” of CONTRAST. To adjust the backlight, touch “DARK”, “NORM, or “LIGHT” of BACKLIGHT. Touch “RETURN” to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. NS nRPwN

Use this screen to enter the extension number of the key operator indicated on the Basic Help screen. © Setting options: 6-digit key operator telephone extension Max. 20 character key operator name Name Input screen ane inourt Key Operator Mode screen Key Operator Data Input screen 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat Gheckly tirer Lock bb nencry JO. lcurn varel adi æie] Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

2. Touch “8. Key ope. Data” to display the Key Operator Data Input screen.

3. Touch “Name” to display the Name Input screen.

Input desired name according to the procedure below. (1) Max. 20 characters can be entered. (2) Touch # Upper arrow and # Lower arrow keys on the Name Input screen to input uppercase and lowercase letters and symbols. (3) Touch “DEL.” key to delete the input character from the last. (4) Touching “CANCEL"on the Name Inputscreen will clear allthe inputcharacters. (5) To change the existing name, touch “DEL.” key to delete it and enter the new name.

4. Touch “OK” on the Name Input screen to return to the Key Operator Data Input

5. Touch ‘For Assistance”.

Enter an extension number up to 8 digits from the keypad on the operation panel. The hyphen will be indicated as a space in the Basic Help screen. If less than 6 digits are entered, the screen will not change when “OK”is touched. Advice Ifan invalid extension number is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digitnumber. Touch “OK”to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. gum Fe]

This function can be accessed only by the key operator after a unique 4-digit Weekly timer master key code is entered. The Weekly Timeris à copier management function thatshuts down powerto the machine on a daily or hourly basis, and can be programmed specifically for lunch breaks, weekends and holidays, or any time the copier is not required. In Addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password requirement) to allow temporary use ofthe machine during periods when power is shut down by the Timer function. Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer *_ The power plug is inserted into the socket. + _ The power switch is turned on. *_ The current date and time are correctly set. If the Weekly timer needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative. The following Weekly timer settings can be made.

1. Weekly Timer Setting

Enable and disable the Timer function

2. Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set

Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week or the entire week.

3. Machine Working Day Individual Set

Specify the working days ofthe machine by the Timer, for all Mondays through Sundays, and/or individually for each day of the given month.

4. Lunch Hour Off Function

Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will go off and on.

Require Password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of usage time. Advice

1. The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock, where hour [1] is the first hour after

midnight; and hour [24]is the hour of midnight. For example, 6 a.m. is 06:00 hours; 6 p.m. is 18:00 hours.

2. The [AUTO RESET]key is used to change numbers determined by the SET touch

key, or to exit from the timer setting mode.

3. The [STOP/CLEAR] key is used to return to the previous menu.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 10. Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode Key Operator Mode screen 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat AE KG. (Pheckly tirer Lock Job menory A10.Tauch panel adi [Æ] Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

2. Touch “9. Weekly Timer”.

The Weekly Timer Master Key Code screen displays, if a code is required.

3. Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key

code, then touch “OK” to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen. Advice If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4- digit code.

4. Select the desired Weekly timer function, and make settings, as required.

5. Toexitthe Weekly timer mode, touch “RETURN'on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu

6. To exitthe Key operator mode, turn the main power switch OFF.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 10. Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

touch “OK” to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen. Advice Ifan invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4- digit code.

3. Touch “1. Weekly timer setting”to display the Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting screen.

4. Touch “YES” to activate Weekly timer, or touch “NO” to de-activate Weekly timer.

The selected key will be highlighted.

5. Touch “OK” to complete settings and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu

6. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9.

7. Ifother Weekly timer settings are required, select another desired menu item, from

8. If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch “RETURN” to restore the Key

10. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 10. Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set [2] Use this function to setthe On/Off times in hours and minutes for the desired days ofthe week. © Setting option: Weekly timer ON time; OFF time Key Operator Mode screen ten. settiné men Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen W.T.ON/OFF Time Setting screen hezkly timer settiné nenu 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat

touch “OK” to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen. Advice If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4- digit code.

3. Touch "2. Weekly timer copier ON/OFF time set” to display the W.T. ON/OFF Time

4. Use the procedure below to setthe ON time and OFF time for the desired days of

the week. (1) Touch “EDIT” to display the W.T. ON/OFF Time Block Setting screen. (2) Touch and highlightthe keys ofthe desired day ofthe week from Monday through Sunday to set the same ON time and OFF time. (3) Touch ON to enter the ON time. Enter a 2-digit ON-hour (ex. 8 a.m. is 08) and a 2-digit ON-minute (ex. 7 min. is

07) using the keypad on the operation panel.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 10. Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

(4) Touch OFF to enter the OFF time. Enter a 2-digit OFF-hour (ex. 6 p.m. is 18) and a 2-digit OFF-minute using the keypad on the operation panel. Advice 1 IFON-time and OFF-time are the same, power will not go on. 2 Be sure to enter both ON-time and OFF time. (5) Touch “OK” to complete settings and return to the W.T. ON/OFF Time Setting screen. (6) Confirm the ON-time and OFF-time on the W.T. ON/OFF Time Setting screen.

5. Use the procedure below to delete the ON-time and OFF-time of the day of the

week. (1) Touch the A Upper arrow and Y Lower arrow keys to select the day of the week to be deleted. (2) Touch “DEL.” (3) On-time and OFF-time of the day of the week are deleted and “—:—" are displayed. Advice On the day ofthe week with the ON/OFF-time deleted, you can notturn on the power. . Ifno further changes are required, proceed to step 9. . Ifother Weekly timer settings are required, touch “RETURN"to return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen. Select another desired menu item, from [1]-45]. , Ifno other Weekly timer settings are required, touch “RETURN"to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. , Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. SS © mo

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 10. Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Machine Working Day Individual Set [3] Use this function to set the On/Off condition of the copier for a given month. Setthe On- Off condition for specific days; or collectively, for all Mondays through Sundays of the given month. The default setting is collective: On for Mondays through Saturdays, and Off for Sundays. Key Operator Mode screen en/oc ettiné menu Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen W.T. Working Day Individual Setting Screen feckly timer setting nenu leekly timer settiné 2 Weekly tiner Cowier ONF tine set 5 Password settiné AE KG. (Pheckly tirer Lock Job menory A10.Tauch panel adi [Æ] Men LUN Sat [ON Jr Te LE) à CO lei MORT ho COTE Fi CR ET MC Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

2. Touch “9. Weekly timer”. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then

touch “OK” to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen. Advice If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4- digit code.

3. Touch “3. Machine working day individual set” to display the W.T. Working Day

Individual Setting screen.

4. Use the procedure below to individually set the timer-active days.

(1) Touch the key for the timer-active day to be highlighted. (2) Use the A Upper arrow and Y Lower arrow keys to scroll to the desired month.

5. Use the procedure below to collectively set the timer-active days by the day ofthe

week. (1) Touch “Block Set” to display the W.T. Working Day Block Setting screen. (2) To set the Timer action ON, touch “ON” for the desired day. To setthe Timer action OFF, touch “OFF” for the desired day. If you touch an already-highlighted key, no change will occur. F7] Key Operator Mode

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 10. Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

(3) Touch “OK”to complete settings and return to the W.T. Working Day Individual Setting screen. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 9. If other Weekly timer settings are required, touch “RETURN"to return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen. Select another desired menu item, from [1]-45]. If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch “RETURN” to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. , Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. Ss œ no

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 10. Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Lunch Hour Off Function [4] The Weekly timer function turns the copier ON and OFF once a day. Use this Lunch hour off function to shut down power for lunch break then turn on again while the copier is turned on due to the Weekly timer function. The only one off time interval can be programmed. © Setting options: Lunch hour off function ON;OFF Lunch hour off-time © Default setting: Lunch hour off function OFF Key Operator Mode screen ten/ccoier settiné mer Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen Lunch Hour Off Setting screen Heskls timer setting menu oi L.System Initial P.Crpier Initial LHeekly tiner settins (2 Weekly timer Copier ONF time set (8.Machine aorkiné dy individual set UE KC. .heckly timer Block Job menory JH0.Touch sarel adi Lunch hour off function D .Password settiné Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

2. Touch “9. Weekly timer”. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then

touch “OK” to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen. Advice If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4- digit code.

3. Touch “4. Lunch hour off function” to display the Lunch Hour Off Setting screen.

4. Use the procedure below to activate Lunch hour off.

(1) Touch “Function ON” to highlight it. (2) Touch ‘off-time”. Enter a 2-digit off-hour (ex. 9 a.m. is 09) and a 2-digit off-minute (ex. 7 min. is

07) using the keypad on the operation panel.

(3) Touch ‘“on-time”. Enter a 2-digiton-hour and a 2-digiton-minute using the keypad on the operation panel.

5. To de-activate Lunch hour off, touch “Function OFF”. The Function OFF setting is

the default setting.

6. Touch “OK” to complete settings and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu

7. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 10.

8. Ifother Weekly timer settings are required, select another desired menu item, from

9. If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch “RETURN” to restore the Key

Operator Mode screen.

11. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Section 11 : Key Operator Mode 10. Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Password Setting [5] Use the Password Setting mode to establish a 4-digit password requirement for using Timer Interrupt. The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be interrupted without the requirement for password entry. © Default setting: Timer interrupt password 0000 Key Operator Mode screen fe tiné menu Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen W.T. Interrupt Password Setting screen Heskls timer setting menu 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat LHeekly tiner settins (2 Weekly timer Copier ONF time set AE KG. (Pheckly tirer Lock Job menory A10.Tauch panel adi [Æ] Lunch haur oft function D .Password settiné Machine working day individual set Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

2. Touch “9. Weekly timer”. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then

touch “OK” to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen. Advice Ifan invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4- digit code.

3. Touch “5. Password setting”to display the W.T. Interrupt Password Setting screen.

the setting. Advice When the password setting is 0000, timer interrupt can be used by turning the copier Off, then On. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8. If other Weekly timer settings are required, touch “RETURN"to return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu screen. Select another desired menu item, from [1]-45]. If no other Weekly timer settings are required, touch “RETURN” to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. pe = pm

11. Touch Panel Adjustment [10]

Use this feature to check the malfunction of the LCD touch screen due to the shift in position of the touch sensor. © When the Control Panel Adjustment Screen does not display in step 2, press one from keypad [0] - [9]. Touch Panel Adjustment screen Key Operator Mode screen ten/copier setting menu 1Systen Initial Dtapier imitia (Press 2 marks on e-risht à lowrloft | Press the 2 CHECK buttons, &, Quzzer should be Feard. [It thor buzz. Press SIPrLER 4 Veadhst cnes more. Please press START after finishiné adiustment . A Meekly_+imer 5-Lock cb menory f10.louch panel adi Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. Touch “10. Touch panel adj.” to display the Touch Panel Adjustment screen. Touch the “+” indication at the upper right and lower left corners on the Control Panel Adjustmentscreen. The presentcoordinates will be displayed in the message area of the screen. Checkthatthe X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line ofthe message area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line. Touch the “CHECK"s at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally. Ifthe coordinates fall out of the range ofthe standard value in step 4, or the buzzer tone does not sound in step 5, please contact Konica service representative. Turn power OFF.

2. To display menus [11] to [15] of the Key Operator Mode screen, touch # Lower

4. Touch the desired tray key to set the size detection type.

5. Touchthe À Upper arrow and Y Lower arrow key to change the setting ofthe item

(Inch, AB, or Auto detect). AB: APS functions for AB size paper only. Inch: APS functions for inch size paper only. Auto detect: APS functions for the sizes previously selected by the service according to the destination of the copier. Advice This setting cannot be applied to the fixed trays.

6. Touch “OK” to complete settings and return to the Key Operator Mode screen.

8. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off become activated. Or, select the Auto Shut Off function to On or Off. © Setting options: See list below © Default settings: Auto low power; 15 min. Auto shut off; 60 min. Key Operator Mode screen 1 enfcoier settiné men Key Operator Mode screen 2 Power Save Timer Setting screen 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat 20m bave 13 .Menory SW 1.List Print 15 KRDS host Le] AE KG. (Pheckly tirer Lock Job menory A10.Tauch panel adi [Æ] Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digitkey operator password, then touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

4. The Timer Key is located on the Power Save Timer Setting screen below the Auto

Low Power indicator. Touch the Timer Key to select a specific waiting period before activation of the Auto Low Power function. The default setting is 15min. If the Auto Shut off function is not desired, proceed to step 6. Ifthe “Auto Low Power” indicator light is dim and the Timer Key cannot be selected, proceed to step 5. Advice 1 The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting. 2 Ifthe same period oftime as Auto ShutOffis selected, the Auto Low Power indicator light will dim, and Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power. Key Operator ode

Save Timer Setting screen, to select the period of time to wait before activating Auto Shut Off. The default setting is 60min. Advice Ifthe period of time selected for Auto Shut Off is shorter than the Auto Low Power setting, the setting for Auto Low P ower will be automatically changed to that ofthe Auto Shut Offsetting, and the Auto Low Powerindicator light will dim. In this case, Auto Low Power will not function.

6. Touch “NEXT” on the Timer Setting screen to display the Auto Shut Off ON/OFF

7. Touch “ON”to activate Auto Shut Off, or touch “OFF” to de-activate it. The default

setting is the “ON” setting. When “OFF"is selected, Auto Shut Off will not function and the period of time for Auto Low Power can be selected from 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 90, 120, and 240min.

8. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 10.

9. If other Auto Low Power/Auto Shut Off settings are required, touch “RETURN” to

restore the Key Operator Mode screen.

11. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations.

This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below. Underlined settings indicate factory settings. See pp. 11-47-11-48 for details on Memory Settings. SW No. No.01: No.02: No.03: No.04: No.05: No.06: No.07: No.08: No.09: No.10: No.11: No.12: No.13: No.14: No.15: No.16: No.17: No.18: No.19: No.20: No.21: No.22: No.23: No.24: No.25: Item Auto reset timer AUTO/RESET effect Load RADF effect Non Image A. Erase RADF frame erasure Auto tray switch Platen APS RADF APS ATS/APS (Bypass) ATS/APS (Tray 1) ATS/APS (Tray 2) ATS/APS (Tray 3) ATS/APS (Tray 4) Platen AMS RADF AMS Staple mode reset Key click sound Job memory recall Sheet insertion A5 orig. type Rotation 1 SHOT indication time Booklet Folded Original RADF non-std, size Setting (default is underlined) OFF/ 30sec./ 60 sec./ 90 sec./ 120 sec./ 150 sec./ 180 sec./ 210 sec./ 240 sec./ 270 sec./ 300 sec. Full-Auto/ Initial Setting RADF/RADF +Auto Reset ON/ APS, AMS only None/ 1 mm/2 mm/3 mm/ 4 mm/5 mm OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ON OFF/ Low/ High OFF/ON Tray 1/Tray 2/ Tray 3/ Tray 4/ Bypass Landscape/ Portrait OFF/ON/APS, AMS only/ APS only 2 sec./ 3 sec./ 4 sec./ 5 sec. lton/ntol OFF/ON OFF/ON Key Operator Mode

APS/MS only Rotation ISHÔT Indication 382e. Eocklet Left bindiné Folded Drinizal OFF EAP norcstd, Size (FE Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

3. Touch “13. Memory SW'to display the Memory Switch screen. The Memory Switch

screen can be scrolled to the third screen.

4. Use the procedure below to select the desired item and change the setting.

(1) Touch A Upper arrow and Y Lower arrow keys at the right on the Memory Switch screen to scroll the screen. (2) Touch # Upper arrow and # Lower arrow keys atthe lower lefton the Memory Switch screen to highlight the desired item. (3) Touch “EDIT” to change the setting of the highlighted item. (4) Repeat above steps (1) to (3) to make several changes in succession.

5. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 7.

6. Ifotherkey operator setting are required, touch “RETURN”to restore the Key Operator

Mode screen. . Turn power OFF. , Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. Lo"

The following functions can be provided by the Memory switch settings. [1] Auto reset timer Sets the time interval for the machine to reset to the initial condition. Options: Off or 30/60/90/120/150/180/210/240/270/300 seconds. [2] Auto/reset effect Sets the condition of Copy mode, Copy density, Magnification, and Paper tray selection when the AUTO/RESET key is pressed. Options: Full-auto or Initial settings. Full-auto is the default setting. [31 Load RADF effect Determines how the machine initializes when it is in the platen copy mode (non RADF) and an original is inserted in the RADF feed tray. Options: RADF and RADF + AUTO/ RESET. The RADF option will activate the RADF without resetting any other features. The RADF +AUTO/RESET option will activate the RADF and reset the machine to the features programmed in memory switch #2. [4] Non Image Area Erase Establishes how the machine determines the image area of the copy. Options: ON and APS/AMS only. ON option limits the copy image area to thatofthe original. The APS/AMS only option limits the copy image area to thatofthe copy paper sizes and the magnification automatically selected by the machine. [51 RADF frame erasure Sets the amount of frame erase when using the RADF. Options: None, 1mm/ 2mm/ 3mm/ 4mm/ 5mm. [6] Auto tray switch During a copy job when ATS is on and multiple paper trays are loaded with the same size paper, the machine will automatically switch to another tray when the initial tray runs out of paper. Refer to memory switches 9 through 13 to activate this feature for each tray. [7] Platen APS This feature allows the machine to automatically detect the size of the original placed on the glass and select the same size copy paper. Refer to switches 9 - 13 to activate this feature for each tray. [81 RADF APS This feature allows the machine to detect the size of the original fed through the RADF. Refer to switches 9 - 13 to activate this feature for each tray. [91 ATS/APS (Bypass) This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Multi-sheet bypass. [10] ATS/APS (Tray 1) This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 1. [11] ATS/APS (Tray 2) This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 2. [12] ATS/APS (Tray 3) This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 3.

[13] ATS/APS (Tray 4) This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 4. [14] Platen AMS This feature allows the machine to automatically select the proper magnification ratio when copy paper size is selected manually and an original is placed on the platen glass. [15] RADF AMS This feature allows the machine to automatically select the proper magnification ratio when copy paper size is selected manually and an original is fed from the RADF. [16] Staple mode reset When copying in the sort/staple mode, this setting allows the machine to automatically reset to non-staple mode when the job in progress is completed. [17] Key click sound When this feature is Low or High, the machine activates a buzzer sound when the touch sensitive screen is touched or any key is pressed. This confirms the machine recognition of the selection. [18] J ob memory recall This feature allows the machine to initialize using selections stored in job memory #15 when the power is turned on or the AUTO RESET button is pressed. [19] Sheet insertion This setting allows selection oftray 1, tray 2, tray 3, tray 4 or Bypass as the source ofthe inserted sheets. [20] A5 orig. type Selects orientation of A5 size originals. Options: Landscape or portrait. [21] Rotation When turned on the feature allows the machine to automatically rotate an A4/B5 original image to match the manually selected paper size. For example, if an original is placed in the RADF or on the platen glass in the A4R/B5R position and the A4/B5 paper size is selected, the machine will rotate the image to fitthe A4/B5 paper. [221 1 SHOT indication time Determines the duration of messages that are displayed, i.e., 50 SHEETS MAXIMUM IN STAPLE MODE. Options: 2/ 3/4 or 5 seconds. [231 Booklet Selects the binding margin direction that functions with Booklet. [24] Folded original This feature sets the RADF to accept the folded originals. [25] RADF non-std. size Identify the special original size which the machine could not detect in order to selected the optimum paper size for copying or printing. po"

Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items.

• Job memory list: Programmed contents of J ob memory *_ User setting list: Machine informations managed by EKC and home position settings selected by user + _ Font pattern: Font patterns used in the machine Key Operator Mode screen 1 ten. tiné menu Key Operator Mode screen 2 List Print screen 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat 12roner Gare 1 enory 5 User setliné list Font attern (-heckly tirer x 1.List Print Lock Job menory A10.Tauch panel adi 15 KRDS host [a] Procedure L While pressing HELP button, turn power ON. Enter a 4-digit key operator password and touch “OK” to display the Key Operator Mode screen. Advice If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. To display menus [11]to [15]ofthe Key Operator Mode screen, touchthe # Lower arrow key. Touch “14. List Print” to display the List Print screen. Touch ‘J ob memory list”, “User setting list”, or “Font pattern”. Touch “OK” to print out the desired list. Touch “CANCEL” to stop printing. After completion of printing, the copier will automatically return to the Key Operator Mode screen.

6. If no further changes are required, turn power OFF.

When activated, the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by a Konica service representative. In case of machine trouble, select the KRDS host option. Your service representative will contact you to determine the appropriate means for resolving the problem. © Setting options: Call for J AM; SC; No toner; No paper; Copy quality, Other reason Key Operator Mode screen 1 en. settiné men Key Operator Mode screen 2 KRDS Host Menu screen ciné iters 1Systen Initial Dtapier (nt Uat 20m bave (3ND TONER 13 .Menory SW 1.List Print 15 KRDS host Le]

“6. OTHER REASON”. The Start Call Screen will be displayed. Touch “START” to call remote service representative. If no further changes are required, proceed to step 8. If other key operator settings are required, touch “RETURN” to restore the Key Operator Mode screen. Turn power OFF. Turn the copier power switch back ON to perform copying operations. pe nom

Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble

3. Paper J am Processing

Jam in Current] ob Jam in Reserve j ob Paper J am Position Screen Paper J am Processing Screen

The Service Call screen will display the telephone number and fax. number of your service centre.

1. Write down the Report Code, as stated on the 2nd line of the message;

2. Turn OFF the power switch and main power switch;

3. Disconnect from the power socket;

4. Contact your Service Centre and inform them of the Report Code.

Section 12 : Troubleshooting 1. Service Call (continued)

Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble Ifthe message shown below is displayed on the Service Call Screen, you may continued operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this limited functionality of the copier, consult your Konica service centre. Be sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately. Procedure 1 Ifthe limited use of the copier is available, not the Report code but the following message will be displayed instead of the report code. Tray 2 failure Press AUTO to select except this tray

2. Press the AUTO RESET button.

Please switch ON/OFF E 18-2

3. Turn OFF then ON the power switch.

Copying job can be continued without using the portion in trouble (ex. Tray 2). AN CAUTION EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE OPERATION, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT YOUR KONICA SERVICE CENTRE WHEN THE SERVICE CALL SCREEN IS DISPLAYED. Service Call

In certain copy modes, the 7040 uses memory to make operations convenientand smooth flowing. Occasional memory overflow may occurifthe installed memory is inadequate for the copy conditions selected. Memory overflow messages are displayed as follows: - Memory full -Start => START key Cancel => ST/CL key - Memory full - Check output and reload original (Alternately displayed) This section describes the copy modes supported by the memory and the actions that need to be taken in order to continue or suspend the job. Advice Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended to extend the memory capacity in your machine. Contact your Service Centre, if required. Copy Conditions Using Memory When the memory overflow occurs, you should process either oftwo actions as described below. (1) When copying in Group mode and except in the Store mode, do the Action 1. (2) When copying except in Group mode and Very high mode, do the Action 2.

Action 1 Action is required when a job prematurely stops after the machine produces one copied set, and the Memory overflow messages display. (1) When preparation ofthe scanned data satisfies the print quantity setting, the machine will stop, the following messages display alternately, and scanned data will be erased. - Memory full - Check output and reload original (2) Check pages of the discharged set to confirm the amount of missing data, before completing the job. Press the START PRINT button to complete the job according to the print quantity remaining. Action 2 Action 2 is required when a job ceases with no copies produced, and Memory overflow messages display alternately. To continue the job: (1) Press the START PRINT button to allow the machine to prepare the scanned data for job completion in the amount remaining in the print quantity setting. (2) When preparation ofthe scanned data satisfies the print quantity setting, the machine will stop, the following messages display alternately, and scanned data will be erased. - Memory full- Start = PRINT key Cancel =>ST/CL key If continuous working Check output after copying (3) Check pages of the discharged set to confirm the amount of missing data, before completing the job. Press the START PRINT button to complete the job according to the print quantity remaining. To suspend the job: (1) press the STOP/CLEAR button to save the job settings. All scanned data will be erased. (2) Press the AUTO RESET button to resume initial settings, if desired.

3. Paper J am Processing

Jam in Current J ob If paper jam occurs, the START PRINT button will be lit in orange and the touch screen will display the following Paper J am Position screen, disabling copying. Dispose the jam according to the message of Paper J am Position screen. Paper J am Position screen Paper J am Processing screen Procedure

[7° Touch “GUIDE” on the J am Position screen. The Paper] am Processing screen will be displayed. Touch # Upper arrow and $ Lower arrow keys to scroll the screen. Remove the misfed paper/original. Please Be Reminded + Remove misfed paper so that small pieces of paper do not remain in the machine. + Do not touch the surface ofthe drum. Touch “EXIT” on the P apr J am Processing screen. If jam processing of all the locations has been completed, Basic screen will be restored. Clear process, misfed paper remains atany other location after completion of jam, Paper] am Position screen will be displayed. Re-check the misfed paper till Basic screen is restored.

3. Paper J am Processing (continued)

Jam in Reserve J ob If paper jam occurs while setting the copying condition in the reserve mode, the following screen appears. “JAM ” Folder Key and ERROR Indicator Basic screen Operation panel para

senor cn. ELU | Trouble in the current job occurs. See p. 7-15. Jam Position in “RESERVE” Folder Key Trouble in the reserve job occurs. See p. 7-15 to p. 7-16.

Section 12 : Troubleshooting 3. Paper J am Processing (continued)

Papr Jam Position Screen “GUIDE” key If“GUIDE” key is touched, a screen for ilustrating the correct method for the disposal action to be taken with the highest priority displayed Message section Atfirst, ‘Mishandled paper’message is displayed, and subsequentiy a fixed disposal action is displayed. Paper J am Position Screen Jam No. ———— The location where jam : . occurs is indicated by Paper jam position flashing or lighting. — display section TT The Paper] am Position Arrow The disposal action is Sn dire a tre pacated by flashing or jam numbers and arrows for the sake of explanation. lt ighting. does not actually happen that all of them are displayed. *_ The Paper J am Position screen consists of message section and paper jam position display section. *_ The paper jam position display section shows each location of jam by a jam No. and the disposal action for it by an arrow. *_If paper jam occurs at several locations, several jam Nos. and arrows flash or light. The flashing jam No. and arrow express the jam to be disposed with the highest priority.

• The message section is interlocked with the flashing jam No. and arrow, and shows one or two (alternatively) actions to be taken with the highest priority. Paper J am Processing Screen If “GUIDE” key is touched, Paper J am Processing screen illustrating à concrete method will be displayed to allow a series ofillustrations to be displayed one after another. Paper J am Processing Screen Description section What should be done is described here. Backward button Press for seeing the previous illustration Paper jam processing display section Forward button — Press for seeing the next illustration

Section 12 : Troubleshooting 3. Paper J am Processing (continued)

AN CAUTION: Fixing Unit The Fixing unitis internally very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH. Be careful when withdrawing the fixing unit. AN CAUTION: Drum Unit The drum unit has a high voltage generated. To avoid an electrical shock. DO NOT TOUCH. AA CAUTION: ADU Guide Plate The ADU guide plate is not latched when raised. D: t release it, otherwise the ADU guide plate will slam shut and may cause injury. VAN CAUTION: Finisher Operation DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving portions or into the grooves of the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be injured. DO NOT PUT your hands beneath or above the middle exit tray ofthe Finisher when itis moving, otherwise you may be injured. A CAUTION: Wedged Staples Exercise caution when removing wedged staples to avoid injury. Paper jam

\hen any trouble affects the electric signal of the copier, the Power OFF/ON Screen will be isplayed. Tum OFF then ON the power switch. Power OFF/ON Screen Please switch ON/OFF Please turn the OFF and ON If SC still oceurs, call service center. Advice Turn the power ON in 10 seconds later from turning OFF.

Symptom Check point Remedy Main Body Power switch is turned ON, but copier does not operate. Is plug-socket correct? Is the Weekly timer indicator lighted? + Connect correctiy to power source. Weekly timer function is ON. Use the forcible ON facility , or Contact your key operator. Copying will not Is the Front door completely Close the Front door start after closed? completely. pressing START | Is the Tray inserted appropriate | + Load appropriate size paper into PRINT button, for the original size? Tray. Is the print quantity setting “0"?. | + Set required number of copies. Copy image is Is the Left partition glass, + Clean. dirty. Platen glass or RADF platen guide cover clean? Is the original clean? + Remove marks. Is density adjustment correct? | + Adjust density by using manual (manual) mode or Density shift. (See pp. 6-24-6-27.) If further adjustment required, contact your service centre. Copy image is ls density adjustment correct? | + Adjust density by using manual too light. (manual) mode or Density shift. (See pp. 6-24-6-27.) If further adjustment required, contact your service centre. Is the ‘Please ADD Toner” + Add toner. message displayed? Copy image is Is copy paper damp? + Replace copy paper. not clear. Is the “Call for PM" message + Call your service centre. displayed? Magnification Is Repeat, Image Shift Reduce | + Cancel Repeat, the Image Shift, cannot be & Shift or Dual Page mode Reduce & Shift or Dual Page changed. established? mode. Copying cannot Can you find paper jam + Confirm on LCD whether paper be effected even | occurring also at any other jam occurs also at any other after disposal of | location? location. Dispose of any other paper jam. jam you find. 1»20r2k2 Is ADU completely returned? + Return the ADU completely. mode cannot be selected. 2}1or2k2 Is RADF fully closed? + Fully close the RADF. mode cannot be selected. Pour OFFJON Screen p-n | its,

Symptom Check point Remedy When usingthe |Is the “Exceeds limit” message | + Contact your Key operator. ê EKC, copies displayed? à | cannot be taken £ | even when the ë password is entered. RADF indicator |1s RADF fully closed? + Fully close the RADF. will not light after pressing AUTO RESET button. ë Originals will not |ls RADF fully closed? + Fully close the RADF. feed. Are only valid originals being + Set manually on Platen glass, if used? not. Are the originals correctly + Correctly load the originals loaded? without exceeding the capacity. Finisher does not |ls there paper misfeed in * Remove, if any. operate. Finisher? & Is Finisher door closed + Close properly. £ properly? Ê Stapling position Is the Rotation activated? + Reset the original so as notto rotates by 90°, activate the Rotation (see pp. 6-36-6-38). Automatic duplex |Are previous copies left in + Remove copies from ADU. à copying is not ADU? < | possible.

1. Main Body Specifications

Main body RADF (DF-311)

2. Option Specifications

FS-105 In-Bin Stapler Finisher Drawer Base Unit (DB-208) Drawer Base Unit (DB-208A) Drawer Base Unit (DB-608) Memory Unit Key Counter

Maintenance Kit (100,000 copies) (except for the United Kingdom)

1. Main Body Specifications

1. Main Body Specifications

Main Body Name: Type: Transfer method: Platen glass: Light-sensitive unit: Light source: Developing method: Fixing method: Density adjustment: Magnification ratio: Copy paper: Copying speed: Continuous copying: Types of original: Original size: Copy size: Paper supply method: Warm-up time: First copy time: Power: Power consumption: Sound power level: Weight: Size: Effective size: Konica 7040 Console type indirect electrostatic method Fixed OPC Halogen lamp (240W) Dry, 2-component magnetic brush developing Heat roller Automatic and manual (9 steps) and 2 Usersets 1:1#4.0% Enlargement: 1:1.150 (115%), 1:1.220 (122%), 1:1.410 (141%) Reduction: 1:0.860 (86%), 1:0.820 (82%), 1:0.710 (71%) Zoom/S pecial ratio magnification ratio: 25% to 400% (in 1% increments) Plain paper: 60 to 90g/m? Special papers: 50 to 59g/m?, 91 to 130g/m? (with the Multi-sheet bypass tray) 40 copies/min. (A4), 31 copies/min. (A4R), 23 copies/min. (A3), 40 copies/min. (B5), 26 copies/min. (B4), 34 copies/min. (B5R) 1 to 999 copies Sheet, book originals A3 maximum A3 to ASR size (image cutoff width: leading and trailing ends 4.5mm+#1.5mm, top and bottom 1.5mmÆ+1.5mm) Tray 1 (Universal); 500 sheets Main body with DB-208 Tray 2-4 (Universal); 500 sheets Main body with DB-208A Tray 2 (Universal); 500 sheets Storage Main body with DB-608 Tray 2 (Universal); 500 sheets Tray 3 (Service-fixed); 1,500 sheets Multi-sheet bypass tray; 100 sheets Approximately 1.5 minutes

RADF (DF-311) Function: Feeds 1- and 2-sided originals automatically Type of original: Plain paper (60 to 130g/m?) Original size: A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5"x11" (A5 is available in the horizontal feed only) Original capacity: 50 sheets max. (80g/m!) Original insertion: Automatic feed at a time Power source: Supply from main body These specifications are subject to change without notice. 13-3 SET

FS-105 In-Bin Stapler Finisher Type: Number of bins: Sorting system: Types of paper: Number of stapled sheet: Staple cartridge: Dimensions: Weight: Power source: Multiple exit tray (2 offset catch trays, 1 fixed tray)

Sorting by shifting (3042 mm) (copies are delivered face up) A3,B4,F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"X1IR, 8.5"x11" (60 to 90g/m? paper) 50 sheets max. or 5 mm or less (80g/m? paper) 20 sheets max. in Thick paper mode 5,000 staples x 2 546(W) x 599.2(D) x 702.5(H) mm 37.1kg Supply from main body Drawer Base Unit (DB-208) Function: Unit: Paper size: Tray capacity: Type of paper: Power source: Paper feed into main body Tray x3 A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5"x11"R (60 to 90g/m° paper) Upper tray: 500 sheets (80g/m° paper) Middle tray: 500 sheets (80g/m? paper) Lower tray: 500 sheets (80g/m? paper) Plain paper (60 to 90g/m? paper) Supply from main body Drawer Base Unit (DB-208A) Function: Unit: Paper size: Tray capacity: Type of paper: Power source: Paper feed into main body and Storage Tray x1,Rackx1 A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5"x11"R (60 to 90g/m° paper) Upper tray: 500 sheets (80g/m° paper) Plain paper (60 to 90g/m? paper) Supply from main body Drawer Base Unit (DB-608) Function: Unit: Paper size: Tray capacity: LCT capacity: Type of paper: Power source:

Paper feed into main body Trayx1,LCTx1 Tray, A3, B4, F4/8.5"x13", A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, 8.5"X11R (60 to 90g/m? paper) LCT; A4R, A4, B5R, B5, 8.5"x11R (60 to 90g/m° paper) 500 sheets (80g/m? paper) 1,500 sheets (80g/m? paper) Plain paper (60 to 90g/m? paper) Supply from main body

Memory unit Key Counter When the copier is used by several departments, this counter can effectively control the copy volume for each department. These specifications are subject to change without notice. 13-5 SET

Maintenance Kit (100,000 copies) (except for the United Kingdom)

Cleaning blade Collection roller ass'y Cleaner idler gear Fixing cleaning roller Fixing roller (A) Fixing cleaning pad Toner filter Charging cleaning block/C ass'y Charging cleaning block/D ass'y Charging control plate Charging wire Discharge wire Cleaning pad (10pcs) Dust bag (rubber band) Deve. collection sheet (rubber band) Hand case for collection Cotton swab (4pcs) BhhhUNbRERRRRRRER

{ Recycled paper is used for the inside pages of this manual. MANUFACTURER